 |
Operating
Instruction 1543-CSH 109 32/1-V2 Uen A
|
 |
Copyright
© Ericsson AB 2007 - All Rights Reserved.
Disclaimer
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without the written
permission of the copyright owner.
The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to
continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have
no liability for any error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this
document.
Contents
A MINI-LINK TN Network Element (NE) has an embedded Web server hosting an
Embedded Element Manager (EEM) application. Local management is performed using
a Local Craft Terminal (LCT), that is a locally connected PC, accessing the EEM
from a Web browser. The EEM can also be accessed remotely over the DCN or
launched from MINI-LINK Manager.
This operating instruction mainly describes how to use an LCT to set up,
configure and maintain MINI-LINK TN equipment. However, the information is
valid for other ways of accessing the EEM, unless otherwise stated.
MINI-LINK Service Manager (MSM) is conveniently launched from the EEM for
management of Radio Terminals with MMU2.

Figure 1 Local management using the LCT
This operating instruction is written for field technicians and supervisors
who work with installation, configuration and maintenance of MINI-LINK TN
equipment on site.
It is assumed that the user:
- Has basic understanding of
MINI-LINK network design, operation and terminology.
- Is familiar
with his or her own MINI-LINK network configuration.
- Has basic
understanding of networking technologies.
- Is familiar
with window-based computer systems and interfaces.
- Has the
proper education, training and competence required to perform the tasks in
this document correctly.
This release of this operating instruction applies to MINI-LINK TN 3.1
ANSI.
The information is updated due to the following:
- Improvements and minor changes
of the EEM GUI.
- Configuration of Network
Synchronisation
- Binfile
upgrade support
- LTU 16/1
- ETU2
Table
1 contains documents related to installation and operation of MINI-LINK TN
equipment. References are made in Italics using the
document name only.
Table 1
Related documents
|
MSM 6.6 User Guide |
AE/LZT 712 0193 |
|
MSM 6.6 Installation Guide |
AE/LZT 712 0069 |
|
MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual |
AE/LZT 712 0215 |
|
MINI-LINK TN, MINI-LINK HC, MINI-LINK E
Outdoor Installation Manual |
AE/LZT 712 0015 |
|
MINI-LINK TN, MINI-LINK HC, MINI-LINK E ANSI Product Catalog |
AE/LZT 712 0195 |
|
MINI-LINK TN ANSI Technical Description |
AE/LZT 712 0213 |
|
MINI-LINK DCN Guideline |
1/15443-FGB 101 004/1 |
This section states the typographic and safety conventions used in this
operating instruction.
The following typographic conventions are used:
- Elements in the user interface
- such as window names, dialog box titles and options and menu commands - are
formatted like this: AaBbCc123
- Resource
identifiers - such as file paths, database names and Uniform Resource Locators
(URLs) - are formatted like this: AaBbCc123
- Keywords,
functions and anything else that the system provides are formatted like this:
AaBbCc123.
- Variables
and other placeholders that the system provides are formatted like this: <AaBbCc123>.
- Keywords,
functions and anything else that have to be entered exactly as shown are
formatted like this: AaBbCc123.
- Variables
and other placeholders you have to provide are formatted like this: <AaBbCc123>.
At some places the user must be careful to do as described to avoid
disturbing ongoing traffic, initiate ESD or cause a loss of data. To highlight
such sensitive parts the following safety conventions are used.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Caution means that disturbances may occur if the warning is
neglected. This type of disturbance may cause damage to tangible property
or cause traffic interruptions when doing software work.
|
- Note:
- Notes are used to call to the attention of the
reader key points that might otherwise be overlooked.

Figure 2 ESD symbol
The Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) symbol indicates when external ESD
protection must be used to avoid possible damage to the equipment.
- BullletProof FTP Server. ©
1998-2003 Gene6 SARL. Used under license by Digital Candle, Inc.
- Envoy
(SNMP). © Wind River Systems.
- MontaVista
Linux. © MontaVista Software, Inc.
- ZebOS for
Linux. © IP Infusion Inc.
- Adobe and
Acrobat Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries.
- USBLAN
software. © Belcarra Technologies Corp.
- USB driver.
© Arabella Software Ltd.
- Broadcom
SDK. © Broadcom Corp.
If you have a technical question or have encountered a problem working with
MINI-LINK TN equipment, please contact your local Ericsson representative. When
contacting your local Ericsson representative, please provide the following
information for the fastest possible service:
- Product serial number.
- Your name,
company name and phone number.
- Product name
and version number.
- Type and
version of operating system, including service packs.
- Type and
version of Web browser.
- Complete
description of the problem, including steps to reproduce it.
- Exact
wording of any messages displayed when you encountered the problem.
- Steps taken
to resolve the problem.
- All previous
correspondence with Ericsson.
MINI-LINK TN provides a platform for flexible, scalable and cost-effective
wireless transmission. The system offers integrated traffic routing, PDH and
SONET multiplexing, Ethernet transport as well as protection mechanisms on link
and network level. The software configurable traffic routing minimizes the use
of cables, improves network quality and facilitates control from a remote
location.
The modular system enables new interface units to be added while in
operation. This hot insertion of new plug-in units and automatic software
upgrade ensure that traffic is operational during replacement and functional
upgrade.
Configurations range from small end sites with one single Radio Terminal to
large hub sites where all the traffic from a number of southbound links is
aggregated into one link, microwave or optical, in the northbound direction.
A Network Element (NE) comprises two parts:
- Indoor part of two types:
- Access
Module Magazine (AMM) with plug-in units, see Section
2.1.
- Outdoor
part, see Section
2.2.

Figure 3 Indoor and outdoor parts
The summary below introduces the standard types of indoor units, available in
different versions further described in this section.
| Access Module Magazine (AMM) |
|
Houses the plug-in units and
provides backplane interconnection of traffic, power and control
signals. |
|
| Node Processor Unit (NPU) |
|
Handles the system's control
functions. It also provides traffic and management interfaces. |
|
| Line Termination Unit (LTU) |
|
A plug-in unit that provides PDH or
SONET traffic interfaces. |
|
| Ethernet Interface Unit (ETU2) |
|
A plug-in unit that provides
Ethernet interfaces. |
|
| Modem Unit (MMU) |
|
The indoor part of a Radio Terminal.
This plug-in unit determines the traffic capacity of the Radio
Terminal. |
|
| ATM Aggregation Unit (AAU) |
|
A plug-in unit that provides
aggregation of ethernet traffic. |
|
| Switch Multiplexer Unit (SMU) |
|
Provides protection for the Radio
Terminals. Alternatively it can be configured to interface
MINI-LINK E equipment on the same site. |
|
| Power Filter Unit (PFU) |
|
Filters the external power and
distributes the internal power to the plug-in units via the
backplane. |
|
| Fan Unit (FAU) |
|
Provides cooling for the indoor
part. |
|
The interconnection between the outdoor part (Radio Units and antennas) and
the indoor part is one coaxial cable per MMU carrying full duplex traffic, DC
supply voltage, as well as operation and maintenance data.
The AMM houses the plug-in units and provides backplane interconnection of
traffic, power and control signals. One plug-in unit occupies one slot in the
AMM. The AMM fits into standard 19" or metric racks and cabinets. It is
available in three sizes described below.
The AMM 2p is suitable for end site and repeater site applications. It has
two half-height slots equipped with one NPU2 A and the optional LTU 12xDS1. Two
full-height slots can be equipped with MMU, LTU or ETU. The FAU4 is used
depending on the configuration.

Figure 4 AMM 2p
The AMM 6p is suitable for medium-sized hub sites. It has six full-height
slots and two half-height slots and it houses one NPU1 BA or NPU1 ANSI, one PFU2
and one FAU2. The remaining slots are equipped with MMU, LTU, ETU and SMUs.

Figure 5 AMM 6p
The AMM 6p B is the successor of AMM 6p, providing power redundancy. It has
six full-height slots and two half-height slots and it houses one NPU1 BA or
NPU1 ANSI, one or two PFU3 (in one half-height slot) and one FAU2. The remaining
slots are equipped with MMU, LTU, ETU and SMU.

Figure 6 AMM 6p B
The AMM 20p is suitable for large-sized hub sites, for example at the
intersection between the optical network and the microwave network. It has 20
full-height slots and two half-height slots and it houses one NPU1 BA or NPU1
ANSI, and one or two PFU1. The remaining slots are equipped with MMU, LTU, ETU
and SMU.
A cable shelf is fitted directly underneath the AMM to enable neat handling
of cables connected to the fronts of the plug-in units. An FAU1 is fitted on top
of the AMM unless forced air-cooling is provided. An air guide plate is fitted
right above the FAU1.

Figure 7 AMM 20p
The NPU holds the system's control functions. One NPU is always required in
the AMM. The NPU also provides DS1, DCN and management interfaces.
The unit fits in an AMM 2p. The external power supply is connected directly
to the NPU2 A. It provides 4xDS1 for traffic connection, USB interface for LCT
connection and a 10/100BASE-T Ethernet interface. The Ethernet interface can be
configured to detect the type of cable used and is intended for the optional
features Ethernet Site LAN or Ethernet Traffic.
- Note:
- NPU2 A contains a Removable Memory Module
(RMM). The RMM is intended for future use and should not be removed from the
unit.
The unit fits in an AMM 6p (B) and AMM 20p. It provides 8xDS1 for traffic
connection, 10BASE-T Ethernet interface for LCT connection, three User Input and
three User Output ports.
NPU1 BA is the successor of NPU1 ANSI. It provides 8xDS1 for traffic
connection, USB interface for LCT connection, three User Input, three User
Output ports and a 10/100BASE-T Ethernet interface. The Ethernet interface can
be configured to detect the type of cable used and is intended for the optional
feature Ethernet Site LAN.
- Note:
- NPU1 BA contains a Removable Memory Module
(RMM). The RMM is intended for future use and should not be removed from the
unit.
The LTUs are used to connect traffic from external PDH or DS1 equipment.
The unit fits in an AMM 2p. For sites where the four DS1 interfaces on the
NPU2 A are insufficient, the LTU 12xDS1 provides 12 additional DS1
interfaces.
These units fits in an AMM 2p, AMM 6p (B) or AMM 20p. For sites where the DS1
interfaces on the NPU are insufficient, the LTU 16xDS1 and LTU 16/1 provides 16
additional DS1 interfaces.
The unit fits in an AMM 6p (B) and AMM 20p. It provides one optical or one
electrical OC-3/STS-3 interface.
The ETU2 fits in an AMM 2p, AMM 6p (B) and AMM 20p. It provides five
10/100BASE-T Ethernet interfaces and one 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet
interface.
The MMU is the indoor part of a Radio Terminal determining the traffic
capacity (4 to 34 Mbit/s).
The MMU2 is a traffic agile plug-in unit for C-QPSK modulation used for
traffic capacity 4 to 16xDS1 .
A protected (1+1) Radio Terminal requires two MMU2 units and one SMU2
ANSI.
The local management is done using MSM, which is launched from the LCT.
The MMU2 BA is a traffic agile plug-in unit for C-QPSK modulation used for
traffic capacity 4 to 16xDS1.
A protected (1+1) Radio Terminal requires two MMU2 BA units.
The local management is done using the LCT.
The MMU2 CA is a traffic agile plug-in unit used for the following modulation
schemes and traffic capacities:
- C-QPSK: 4-16xDS1
- 16 QAM:
4-32xDS1
- 32 QAM:
8xDS1
- 128 QAM:
16-32xDS1
The use of the different capacities and modulation scheme depends on
frequency band. For more information, see the MINI-LINK TN,
MINI-LINK HC, MINI-LINK E ANSI Product Catalog.
A protected (1+1) Radio Terminal requires two MMU2 CA units.
The local management is done using the LCT.
The SMU2 ANSI provides either 1+1 radio protection (with MMU2 only) or
co-siting features for MINI-LINK E equipment, depending on how the unit is
configured. It has one O&M connector.
The PFU is connected to the external power supply, which is filtered and
distributed to the plug-in units via the backplane.
The unit fits in AMM 20p. Two PFU1 units connected to separate power supply
sources provide power redundancy.
The unit fits in AMM 6p.
The unit fits in AMM 6p B. Two PFU3 units connected to separate power supply
sources provide power redundancy.
The FAU provides cooling for the AMM and plug-in units.
The unit is fitted directly above the AMM 20p.
The unit is fitted in the AMM 6p (B).
The unit is fitted in the AMM 2p.
The outdoor part is supplied for various frequency bands. It consists of an
antenna, a Radio Unit (RAU) and associated installation hardware. For protected
(1+1) systems, two RAUs and one or two antennas are used. When using one
antenna, the two RAUs are connected to the antenna using a power splitter. The
RAU and the antenna are easily installed on a wide range of support structures.
The RAU is fitted directly to the antenna as standard, integrated installation.
The RAU and the antenna can also be fitted separately and connected by a
flexible waveguide. In all cases, the antenna is easily aligned and the RAU can
be disconnected and replaced without affecting the antenna alignment.

Figure 8 RAUs and antennas in different installation
alternatives
The antennas range from 0.2 m (9") up to 3.7 m (12ft) in diameter Antennas up
to 1.8 m in diameter can be fitted integrated with the RAU and all antennas
can be installed separately, if required.
Below follows a summary of the tools used to manage a MINI-LINK TN
network.
The element management function is implemented as an Embedded Element Manager
(EEM) application, accessed using a standard web browser. For local management a
Local Craft Terminal (LCT) is used, that is the EEM is accessed locally by
connecting a PC to the NPU with a crossed Ethernet cable (NPU1 ANSI) or a USB
cable (NPU2 A/NPU1 BA). The EEM can also be accessed over the site LAN or
remotely over the DCN.
Local management of Radio Terminals based on MMU2 or is mainly done with MSM,
which is launched from the EEM. Terminals based on MMU2 BA, MMU2 CA are handled
by the EEM itself.
A Command Line Interface (CLI) is provided for advanced IP router
configuration and troubleshooting. It is similar to Cisco's industry standard
router configuration and is accessed from a Command Prompt window using
telnet.
Remote management is typically done using MINI-LINK Manager, the network
management tool for all MINI-LINK products. The EEM is launched from MINI-LINK
Manager for access of a single NE.
Each NE provides an SNMP agent enabling easy integration with any other SNMP
based management system.
This section covers the following:
Make sure that your PC fulfils the following requirements:
- Pentium III 750 MHz processor
- One of the
following operating systems:
- Microsoft
Windows 2000 Service Pack 2
- Microsoft
Windows XP Professional
- Microsoft
Windows Vista
- 256 MB RAM
(1 GB RAM for Microsoft Windows Vista)
- 100 MB of
free disk space
- 1024×768
monitor resolution
- CD-ROM drive
- Keyboard and
mouse (or other pointing device)
- One serial
port
- A network
card with a 10BASE-T port
- A USB 1.1
compatible port
- Microsoft
Internet Explorer 6.0
- MSM 6.6 or
later must be installed to configure radio terminals based on MMU2.
The following LCT related software can be installed on the PC:
- BulletProof FTP Server (2.15
or later), for downloading and uploading load modules and configuration files,
see Section
3.2.1.
- MSM (6.5 or
later), to manage Radio Terminals with MMU2, see Section
3.2.2.
- USB driver,
for LCT connection to an NPU2/NPU1 B, see Section
3.2.3.
- Software
Baselines, for software upgrade, see Section
3.2.4.
- Load
modules, for software upgrade, see Section
3.2.5.
BulletProof FTP server (2.15 or later) is used for uploading and downloading
load modules and configuration files. A user account for MINI-LINK TN on the FTP
server and a correct directory structure must be created.
To install BulletProof FTP Server with default settings:
- Start the BulletProof FTP Server
installation program from the MINI-LINK Service Software CD (LZY 214 2358/1).
- In the Licence Agreement
dialog box, click Next to accept the licence agreement.
- In the Installation Options
dialog box, click Next to accept the installation type Standard.
- In the Installation
directory dialog box, click Next to accept the default location of
the FTP server files.
- In the Completed dialog
box, click Close to exit the installation program.
When using the FTP server certain directories must be present as follows:
-- tn_ftp_home
|-- tn_backup_configuration
|-- tn_error_log
|-- tn_licenses
|-- tn_system_release
|-- ml_tn_software
- Note:
- A correct directory structure is a prerequisite
for software upgrade and load of files.
The root directory (tn_ftp_home) and the directories
directly below (tn_backup_configuration, tn_error_log and tn_system_release) are created by the FTP Server
installation program on the MINI-LINK Service Software CD.
tn_backup_configuration is used to store
configuration files uploaded from an NE as backup and configuration files to be
downloaded to an NE. A configuration file is named <hostname>.cfg where <hostname> is typically the name or IP address of an
NE.
tn_error_log is used to store error log files loaded
from the NE, for example <hostname>_active.elog.
- Note:
- Since tn_backup_configuration and tn_error_log are likely to hold files belonging to
several NEs it is important to use file names that can be easily identified.
To avoid overwriting existing files the extension .old should be added, for example <hostname>.cfg.old, before loading a new file to the
FTP server.
tn_licenses is used for LKFs containing licenses to
be installed on an NE.
tn_system_release is used for load modules and the
directories below are created when installing a load module, see Section
3.2.5.
MINI-LINK TN 2.1 ANSIintroduces a new software upgrade concept which puts new
requirements on the directory structure. In MINI-LINK TN 1.1 all load modules
are contained in one Software System Release (SSR) file. The content is
described in an System Release Description File (SRDF).
In MINI-LINK TN 2.1 ANSI, each load module resides in a separate directory.
The load modules included in a Software Baseline (SBL) is described in a
Software Baseline Description File (SBDF).
To facilitate software upgrade and NPU repair in a network with both
"post-2.1" and "pre-2.1" products, the software must be stored in both the old
(1.1) and new (2.1 and later) file structure.
Example
1and Example
2show lists of available files under tn_system_release.
Example 1 Old (1.1) directory structure
.\tn_system_release\CXP9010021_1_R3A\
srdf.tn (SRDF 2.0)
CXP901584_1_R3A (NPU1 ANSI)
CXP9010618_1_R1A (NPU1 BA)
CXP9010617_1_R3A (NPU2 A)
CXCR102004_1_R3A (LTU 155)
|
Example 2 New (2.1 and later) directory structure
.\tn_system_release\ml_tn_software\
CXP9010021_1\CXP9010021_1_R3A (SBDF 2.1 and later)
CXP901584_1\CXP901584_1_R3A (NPU1 ANSI)
CXP9010618_1\CXP9010618_1_R1A (NPU1 BA)
CXP9010617_1\CXP9010617_1_R3A (NPU2 A)
CXCR102004_1\CXCR102004_1_R3A (LTU 155) |
To configure the FTP Server:
- On the Start menu, point to
Programs
BulletProof FTP Server and then click BPFTP Server.
- On the Setup menu, click
User Accounts.
- The Setup User Accounts
dialog box appears.

Figure 9 The Setup User Accounts window
- Right-click in the User
Accounts list and then click Add on the shortcut menu.
- In the Enter Account Name
dialog box, type anonymous and click OK.
This is the default user name.
- In the Setup User Accounts
dialog box, type anonymous in the Password
box. This is the default password.
- Right-click in the
Directories list and then click Add on the shortcut menu.
- In the Select Directory
dialog box, browse to the <drive:>\tn_ftp_home directory and click
Select. The NE uses this directory and its sub-directories for
uploading and downloading configuration files and load modules.
- In the Directories list,
select the <drive:>\tn_ftp_home directory.
- Under Files, select the
Read, Write and Append check boxes.
- Under Directories, select
the Make, List and +Subdirs check boxes.
- Click OK. The FTP server is
now configured to be used by the NE.
- On the Setup menu, point to
Main and then click General.
- In the FTP Server Setup
dialog box, select the Activate Ftp server on startup check box and
then click OK.
- On the Server menu, click
Go On-line to start the FTP server.
MSM (6.5 or later) is required to manage Radio Terminals with MMU2. Install
MSM according to the MSM Installation Guide.
A USB driver must be installed on the PC to be able to connect to the NPU2
A/NPU1 BA. The MINI-LINK Service Software CD (LZY 214 2358/1) provides an installation program
for Belcarra Windows USBLAN Software, hereafter referred to as USBLAN.
To install USBLAN:
- Note:
- Make sure the USB cable is disconnected from
the PC.
- Locate and click the link on the
CD that starts the installation program.
- In the Ericsson Installer ...
License Agreement" dialog box, click I Agree to accept the license
agreement.
- In the Ericsson Installer ...
Installation Folder dialog box, click Install to accept the default
location (C:\Program Files\Ericsson\USBLAN\).
- The first time the USB cable is
connected between the PC and the NPU, the Found New Hardware dialog box
will appear. Complete the procedure on the screen in order to start USBLAN
automatically each time the cable is connected.
More information on installation of USBLAN is found in the readme.txt file available on the CD. After installation,
the file will be located in C:\Program
Files\Ericsson\USBLAN\.
This section describes how to install a new Software Baseline on the LCT PC
for software upgrade. The file containing the baseline is named <product
number>_<R-state>.tar.Z and must be unpacked according to the
instruction below.
To install a Software Baseline on the PC:
- Extract the contents of the file
to the <drive:>\tn_ftp_home
directory.
- Note:
- Make sure the internal directory structure is
preserved as described in Section
3.2.1.2. For example when using WinZip, the Use folder names
check box must be selected in the Extract dialog
box.
This section describes how to install load modules (that are not included in
a Software Baseline) on the LCT PC for software upgrade. The load module file is
named <product
number>_<R-state>.zip and must be unpacked according to the
instruction below.
To install a load module on the PC:
- Create a new folder in <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_system_release\ml_tn_software.
- Rename the new folder to the <product number> of the load module
file.
For example, if the load module file is named CXC113404_R5B.zip, the name of the folder should be CXC113404
- Extract the contents of the load
module file to the new folder.
- Remove the .upg extension from the name of the extracted files.
For example, if an extracted file is named CXC113404_R5B.upg, you should rename it to CXC113404_R5B
This section describes how to connect the PC to the equipment and access the
EEM. It also contains supplementary information regarding PC and browser
settings.
- Section
3.3.1 describes how to start the LCT when working with an NPU2
A/NPU1 BA.
- Section
3.3.2 describes how to start the LCT when working with an NPU1
ANSI.
This section describes how to start the LCT when working with an NPU2 A or
NPU1 BA.
Locally, the NE is accessed using a USB connection and a default IP address
(10.0.0.1). The PC (and the FTP server on the PC)
obtains a dynamic IP address (10.0.0.2) from a DHCP
server in the NE. This means that the PC should be configured to use dynamic IP
addressing.
Remotely, the NE is accessed using the IP address to be used during normal
operation. It is typically found in the site documentation or on the information
plate of the NE. The PC uses a static or dynamic IP address, depending on
whether a DHCP server is used or not, and must be configured accordingly. It is
recommended to use a DHCP server if available.
The NE has two modes of operation as described below.
This mode is used for normal operation, allowing complete configuration
possibilities. The BR (yellow) LED is OFF when the NE is in Normal mode.

Figure 10 LEDs and BR button on the NPU1 BA. For a full
description of the LEDs, see the MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation
Manual.
This mode is used for replacement of the NPU. The LCT will give the
possibility to download a new configuration file in order to restore the
configuration.
Default user names and passwords are used for the NE and the FTP server, see
Section
9.1 and Section
3.2.1.3.
The NPU Installation mode is entered by inserting the NPU in an active NE
(only NPU1 BA) and immediately pressing the BR button during NPU power up (Fault
(red), Power (green) and BR (yellow) LEDs on the NPU are ON). The BR (yellow)
LED will start flashing, indicating that the NE is in NPU Installation mode. The
NPU Installation mode is normally left as a result of the completed replacement
procedure. However, the mode can always be left by pressing the BR button.
The procedures of replacing the NPU is described in Section
10.7 and Section
10.8.
To start the LCT:
- Do one of the following:
- To access a local NE:
- Make sure that the USB driver
is installed on the PC, see Section
3.2.3.
- Connect the USB cable between
your PC and the USB connector on the NPU.
- Configure the PC to use a
dynamic IP address obtained from the DHCP server in the NE (it is also
possible to configure the PC to use the static IP address 10.0.0.2). For more information on IP addressing, see
Section
3.3.3.
- Start a Web browser and make
sure your browser is configured not to use a proxy server. For more
information, see Section
3.3.4.
- In your Web browser, enter the
URL http://10.0.0.1/.
- To access a remote NE:
- In your
Web browser, enter the URL to be used during normal operation. The IP
address is typically found in the site documentation.
- In the Enter
Network Password dialog box, type the user name and password, and
click OK. For more information see Section
9.1.
- A non-configured NE lacks a
configuration a file and an installation wizard will be provided for the
initial setup, see Figure
11. The initial setup is described in Section
5.
A configured NE will display a page like the one in Figure
12. From here you can perform all operations, for example configuration,
see Section
6.
Should the NE be in NPU Installation mode, the LCT will give the
possibility to download a new configuration file in order to restore the
configuration, see Figure
13. The procedures of replacing the NPU is described in Section
10.7 and Section
10.8.

Figure 11 The Radio Terminal Configuration
page

Figure 12 The Alarms and Status page for an AMM
2p

Figure 13 The Restore NPU Configuration
page
This section describes how to start the LCT when working with an NPU1 ANSI.
The NE is accessed using an Ethernet connection.
The NE can operate in different modes providing different functions when
working with the LCT. Below follows a short description of the different
modes.
This mode is used for initial setup of an NE, allowing a limited set of
parameters to be set. It is also used for some specific maintenance procedures.
The NE is accessed using a default IP address (10.0.0.1) and the PC (and the FTP server on the PC) obtains
a dynamic IP address (10.0.0.2) from a DHCP server in
the NE. This means that the PC should be configured to use dynamic IP
addressing. However, using the static IP address 10.0.0.2 on the PC will also work.
Default user name and password are used for the NE and the FTP server, see Section
9.1 and Section
3.2.1.3.
The Node Installation mode is entered by pressing the BR button on the NPU1
ANSI during NE power up, that is when the Fault
(red), Power (green) and BR (yellow) LEDs on the NPU1 ANSI are ON. The BR
(yellow) LED will then start flashing, indicating that the NE is in Node
Installation mode.

Figure 14 Entering Node Installation mode
When the initial setup is completed, the NE leaves Node Installation mode and
goes into Normal mode. However, the Node Installation mode can always be left by
pressing the BR button. An automatic save of the running configuration is always
performed, when leaving the Node Installation mode.
The initial setup is described in Section
5.
This mode is used for replacement of the NPU. The LCT will give the
possibility to download a new configuration file in order to restore the
configuration.
The NE is accessed using a default IP address (10.0.0.1) and the PC (and the FTP server on the PC) obtains
a dynamic IP address (10.0.0.2) from a DHCP server in
the NE. This means that the PC should be configured to use dynamic IP
addressing. However, using the static IP address 10.0.0.2 on the PC will also work.
Default user names and passwords are used for the NE and the FTP server, see
Section
9.1 and Section
3.2.1.3.
The NPU Installation mode is entered by inserting the NPU in an active NE and
immediately pressing the BR button during NPU
power up (Fault (red), Power (green) and BR (yellow) LEDs on the NPU are ON).
The BR (yellow) LED will start flashing, indicating that the NE is in NPU
Installation mode. The mode is also entered if the NPU1 ANSI lacks a startup
configuration file.
The NPU Installation mode is normally left as a result of the completed
replacement procedure. However, the mode can always be left by pressing the BR
button.
The procedure of replacing the NPU1 ANSI 2 is described in Section
10.6.
This mode is used for normal operation, allowing complete configuration
possibilities. The NE is accessed using the IP address to be used during normal
operation. It is typically found in the site documentation or on the information
plate of the NE. The PC uses a static or dynamic IP address, depending on
whether a DHCP server is used or not, and must be configured accordingly. It is
recommended to use a DHCP server if available.
The BR (yellow) LED is OFF when the NE is in Normal mode.

Figure 15 LEDs and BR button on the NPU1 ANSI. For a
full description of the LEDs, see the MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation
Manual.
To start the LCT while the NE is in:
- Connect the Ethernet cable
(twisted pair) between your PC and the 10/100BASE-T connector on theNPU1 ANSI.
- Configure the PC to use a dynamic
IP address obtained from the DHCP server in the NE. For more information on IP
addressing, see Section
3.3.3.
- Note:
- It is also possible to configure the PC to
use the static IP address 10.0.0.2.
- Start a Web browser and make sure
your browser is configured not to use a proxy server. For more information,
see Section
3.3.4.
- In your Web browser, enter the URL
http://10.0.0.1/.
- In the Enter
Network Password dialog box, type the user name and password, and
click OK. For more information see Section
9.1.
Figure
16 shows an example of what will be displayed in your browser when in Node
Installation mode. The initial setup is described in Section
5.
Should the NE be in NPU Installation mode, the LCT will give the
possibility to download a new configuration file in order to restore the
configuration, see Figure
17. The procedure of replacing the NPU 8x2 is described in Section
10.6.

Figure 16 The Radio Terminal Configuration
page

Figure 17 The Restore NPU Configuration
page
- Connect the Ethernet (twisted
pair) cable between your PC and the 10/100BASE-T connector on the NPU1 ANSI.
- Make sure the PC is properly
configured regarding the use of DHCP server. The configuration defines whether
dynamic or static IP addressing should be used. It is recommended to use a
DHCP server if available. For more information on IP addressing, see Section
3.3.3.
- Start a Web browser and make sure
your browser is configured not to use a proxy server. For more information,
see Section
3.3.4.
- Find out the IP address of the NE,
typically from the site documentation or on the information plate of the NE
and enter the URL http://<IP
address>.
- In the Enter
Network Password dialog box, type the user name and password, and
click OK. For more information see Section
9.1.
Figure
18 shows an example of what will be displayed in your browser: From here
you can perform all operations, for example configuration, see Section
6.

Figure 18 The NE Alarms and Status page for an AMM
20p
Your PC can be configured to obtain a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server.
Without the use of a DHCP server, only a static IP address can be used. Follow
the instructions in the section that apply to your operating system.
To configure for static IP addressing:
- On the Start menu, click
Control Panel.
- In Control Panel,
double-click Network and Dial-up Connections.
- In the Network and Dial-up
Connections folder, right-click the connection to be used and click
Properties on the shortcut menu.
- In the Connection
Properties dialog box, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click
Properties.
- In the Internet (TCP/IP)
Properties dialog box, select Use the following IP address.
- Type IP Address and
Subnet Mask.
- Click OK.
To configure for dynamic IP addressing:
- On the Start menu, click
Control Panel.
- In Control Panel,
double-click Network and Dial-up Connections.
- In the Network and Dial-up
Connections folder, right-click the connection to be used and click
Properties on the shortcut menu.
- In the Connection
Properties dialog box, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click
Properties.
- In the Internet (TCP/IP)
Properties dialog box, select Obtain an IP address automatically.
- Click OK.
To configure for static IP addressing:
- On the Start menu, click
Control Panel.
- In Control Panel,
double-click Network Connections.
- In the Network Connections
folder, right-click the connection to be used and click Properties on
the shortcut menu.
- In the Connection
Properties dialog box, select Use the following IP address.
- Type IP Address and
Subnet Mask.
- Click OK.
To configure for dynamic IP addressing:
- On the Start menu, click
Control Panel.
- In Control Panel,
double-click Network Connections.
- In the Network Connections
folder, right-click the connection to be used and click Properties on
the shortcut menu.
- In the Connection
Properties dialog box, select Obtain an IP address automatically.
- Click OK.
This section describes how to configure your browser not to use a proxy
server.
To configure Internet Explorer:
- On the Tools menu, click
Internet Options.
- In the Internet Options
dialog box, click the Connections tab.
- Click LAN Settings.
- In the Local Area Network (LAN)
settings dialog box, clear the Use a proxy server check box and
click OK.
The following should be uninstalled if you want to remove all LCT related
software from the PC:
To uninstall the FTP server:
- On the Start menu, point to
Programs
BulletProof FTP Server and then click Uninstall.
- Follow the instructions on the
screen.
Uninstall MSM according to the MSM Installation
Guide.
To uninstall the USB driver:
- Connect the USB cable between your
PC and the USB connector on the NPU.
- Remove the USB hardware device
using the Control Panel. This is described in detail in the file C:\Program Files\Ericsson\USBLAN\readme.txt.
- Uninstall USBLAN, by
double-clicking the file C:\Program
Files\Ericsson\USBLAN\uninstall.exe.
- Do a manual file search for erblan* and delete the files found.
To uninstall load modules.
- Start Windows Explorer and
locate the <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_system_release\ml_tn_software
folder.
- Select a folder containing load
modules or a specific load module, right-click and then click
Delete.
This section describes the basics of how to work with the EEM.
Figure
19 shows the different parts of the EEM user interface. The main frame
displays information on different pages, further described in Section
11. The other parts are described in the following sections.

Figure 19 EEM user interface
|
A |
Navigation Tree |
D |
Help |
|
B |
Status Bar |
E |
Confirm button |
|
C |
Menu |
F |
Page |
The Navigation Tree is used to locate entities of different types, that is
the NE, plug-in units, interfaces and ports. It is only available in Normal
mode.

Figure 20 The Navigation Tree
Each entity is displayed with an icon and name. Entities that contain
sub-entities, for example a plug-in unit that contains interfaces, are displayed
with a plus-sign in front of its icon. When the plus-sign or the icon is clicked
the entity is expanded and the sub-entities are displayed.
The NE is located at the top of the tree and the plug-in units are located
below. A plug-in unit can contain interfaces and/or ports in different
structures depending on the unit type and the current configuration of the unit.
An interface can contain higher layer interfaces. In this case the interface
icon has a plus-sign that displays the higher layer interfaces when
selected.
The functionality of the EEM is represented by pages reached by clicking menu
commands. The menus change dynamically depending on what type of entity (plug-in
units, interfaces etc.) you have selected in the Navigation Tree. Different
menus are provided depending on the NE's mode of operation. A dimmed menu
indicates a non-available function for the selected entity.
An installation wizard for the initial setup is provided in the following
cases:
- A non-configured NPU2 A/NPU1
BA NE. The wizard will also be available when the initial setup is finished.
- An ANSI NE
in Node Installation mode.
The menu commands are described below.

Figure 21 Menus in the installation wizard
- Configuration -
Displays a menu with configuration commands.
- Radio
Terminal Configuration - Opens the Radio Terminal Configuration
page, providing a guide for initial configuration of Radio Terminals, see Section
11.1.
- Automatic
Configuration - Opens the Automatic Configuration page, providing
a guide for initial configuration of the NE using a configuration file, see
Section
11.3. This always includes configuration of security, DCN and system
parameters. Depending on the contents of the configuration file, it could
also include the configuration of plug-in units and interfaces.
- Manual
Configuration - Opens the Manual Configuration page, providing a
guide for configuration of the NE without using a configuration file, see Section
11.4. This includes configuration of security, DCN and system
parameters.
- Exit
Wizard - Exits the installation wizard.
- Tools
- Displays a menu with miscellaneous commands.
- Change
Password - Opens the Change Password page, where you can change
the passwords for the control_user and view_user, see Section
11.8.
- Emergency Fallback
- Opens the Emergency Fallback page, where you can activate the
previous NPU software release, see Section
11.9.
- Factory
Setting - Opens the Factory Setting page, where you can delete an
existing configuration file and revert the NE to factory setting, see Section
11.11. Only available if there is an existing configuration file.
- Licenses - Opens
the Licenses page, where you can manage licenses for optional
features, see Section
11.94.
- Help
Setup - Opens the Help Setup page, where you can specify the
location of the Help file, see Section
11.93.
- Help
- Displays information on the functions available on a specific page.
Available on all menus.
The menu commands in NPU Installation mode are described below.

Figure 22 Menus in NPU Installation mode
- Configuration -
Displays a menu with configuration commands.
- Restore
NPU Configuration - Opens the Restore NPU Configuration page,
providing a guide to restore the NPU, see Section
11.14.
- Tools
- Displays a menu with miscellaneous commands.
- Help
Setup - Opens the Help Setup page, where you can specify the
location of the Help file, see Section
11.93.
- Help
- Displays information on the functions available on a specific page.
Available on all menus.
The menu commands in Normal mode are described below. The available commands
on a menu depend on the selected entity.

Figure 23 Menus in Normal mode
- Fault - Displays a menu
with fault commands.
- Alarms
and Status - Opens an Alarms and Status page for an entity, where
you can view alarm and status information. See for example Section
11.125.
- Alarm
List - Opens the Alarm List page, where you can view all active
alarms for the NE, a unit or interface, see Section
11.143.
- Event
Log - Opens the Event Log page for the NE, where you can access
alarm and event information in the Event Log, see Section
11.144.
- Error
Log - Opens the Load Error Log page, where you can load an Error
Log from the NE to the FTP server, see Section
11.145. It is also possible to delete the Error Log.
- DCN
- Opens the LAN Status page for the NE, where you can view the status
of the Ethernet interface, see Section
11.103. From this page you can also reach other pages displaying DCN
related status parameters, see Section
11.105 to Section
11.116.
- Ethernet Bridge -
Opens the Ethernet Bridge Status page, where you can view the status
of the Ethernet Bridge implemented in the NPU2 A , see Section
11.101.
- Activities - Opens
the Activities page, where you can view the status of software
upgrade, loops and BERTs in the NE, see Section
11.146.
- Configuration -
Displays a menu with configuration commands.
- Configuration -
Opens a Configuration page, where you can configure an entity. See
for example Section
11.34.
- Traffic
Routing - Opens the Traffic Routing Select Interfaces page for
the NE, where you set up traffic routing for DS1 interfaces, see Section
11.57.
- 1+1 DS1
SNCP - Opens the 1+1 DS1 SNCP Select Interfaces page for the NE,
where you can create SNCP protections for DS1 interfaces, see Section
11.64.
- Basic
NE - Opens the Basic NE Configuration page, where you can specify
general NE parameters, see Section
11.15.
- DCN
- Opens the LAN/Servers Configuration page for the NE, where you can
specify parameters for Ethernet communication and DCN servers, see Section
11.16. Other pages for DCN configuration are accessible from this page.
- Load
Configuration - Opens the Load Configuration page for the NE,
where you can upload and download configuration files, see Section
11.89.
- Ethernet Bridge -
Opens the Ethernet Bridge Configuration page, where you can select
the DS1s to be used for transmission of Ethernet traffic and set parameters
for the Bridge interface, see Section
11.29.
- Installation Wizard
- Opens the installation wizard for an NPU2 A/NPU1 BA NE, see Section
4.3.1.
- All DS1
Configuration - Opens the All DS1 Configurationpage for a plug-in
unit with DS1 interfaces, see Section
11.53. The page is used to configure all DS1 interfaces on the plug-in
unit simultaneously.
- All
VT1.5 Configuration - Opens the All VT1.5 Configuration page,
where you can configure all VT1.5 interfaces on the LTU 155 ANSI
simultaneously, see Section
11.49.
- Protection - Opens
the SWITCH Protection page, where you can configure the protection of
a Radio Terminal, see Section
11.44.
- Reset - Opens the
Reset Configuration page, where you can reset the configuration of a
Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA to default values, see Section
11.41.
- Restore - Opens the
Restore Configuration page, where you can restore configuration of a
Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
11.42.
- Performance -
Displays a menu with performance commands.
- Performance - Opens
a Performance page, where you can view performance data for an
interface. See for example Section
11.155.
- Power - Opens the
Power page, where you can view input and output power performance data for
the RF interface on the RAU, see Section
11.160.
- Security - Displays a
menu with security commands.
- Security - Opens
the Security page for the NE, where you set security parameters, see
Section
11.162.
- Tools
- Displays a menu with miscellaneous commands.
- Report - Opens the
Report page for the NE, where you can generate a configuration and
inventory report, see Section
11.76.
- Loops - Opens the
Loops page where loops can be set on interfaces for fault
localization. This page can be opened on unit or interface level, see Section
11.148. It also possible to select Loops on NE level, opening a
page with links to unit and interface level, see Section
11.147.
- Inventory - Opens
the Inventory page for the NE, where hardware and software inventory
data is displayed, see Section
11.74.
- Restart - Opens the
Restart page, where you can restart the NE or a plug-in unit, see Section
11.92.
- Test - Opens the
Test page, where you can start a BERT on an DS1 interface for
performance evaluation, see Section
11.161. The page can be opened for an NE, DS1 interface or a plug-in
unit that contains an DS1 interface.
- Software Upgrade -
Opens a wizard, where you can upgrade the NE with a new baseline or specific
load modules, see Section
11.78 and Section
11.79.
- Help
Setup - Opens the Help Setup page, where you can specify the
location of the Help file, see Section
11.93.
- Licenses - Opens
the Licenses page, where you can manage licenses for optional
features, see Section
11.94.
- Help
- Displays information on the functions available on a specific page.
Available on all menus.
The Status Bar gives a summary of all alarms and is found at the bottom of
all pages. It also displays additional information as described in Table
2. The Status Bar is automatically updated every tenth second.
- Note:
- If the Status Bar is not displayed properly,
the page must me refreshed.

Figure 24 The Status Bar
Table 2 Status
Bar information
|
Item |
Description |
|
Red field

|
Displays the number of alarms with severity Critical. Clicking the field opens the Alarm List page displaying all alarms with this severity,
see Section
11.143. |
|
Orange field

|
Displays the number of alarms with severity Major. Clicking the field opens the Alarm List page displaying all alarms with this severity,
see Section
11.143. |
|
Yellow field

|
Displays the number of alarms with severity Minor. Clicking the field opens the Alarm List page displaying all alarms with this severity,
see Section
11.143. |
|
Blue field

|
Displays the number of alarms with severity Warning. Clicking the field opens the Alarm List page displaying all alarms with this severity,
see Section
11.143. |
|
Activities

|
Opens the Activities page, where you can view the
status of loops, BERTs and software upgrade in the NE, see Section
11.146. |
|
Date and time

|
The date and time of the last notification. The background color
depends on the severity of the last notification. |
|
Confirm

|
Indicates the time left before the NE reverts to the last saved
configuration. Clicking the field will allow you to confirm the
configuration of some specific DCN related parameters. A pop-up dialog is
displayed when there are 3, 2 and 1 minutes left.
Only available if you are logged on as control_user.
For more information, see Section
4.5. |
|
User name

|
Displays the user name currently logged on. |
|
Clock

|
The date and time kept by the NE timer. |
Configuration of parameters that could lead to loss of a DCN channel, for
example change of IP address, need to be confirmed. The confirmation is made
automatically if an NE generated ping command to the EEM PC is successful.
Otherwise, the confirmation must be done manually. This is done using the
Confirm button
, displayed in the
upper right-hand corner on a page. The button is only displayed in Normal
mode.
The Status Bar indicates the remaining time and warnings will be
issued when time is running out.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
If you do not confirm your configurations within 15 minutes,
the NE will make a warm restart, restoring the saved configurations, and
your unconfirmed changes will be lost.
|
- Note:
- The contact with the Web server in the NE will
be lost during the restart.
The Help provides on-screen information about the user interface as well as
working instructions. Information on a specific page is accessed by clicking
Help on a menu.

Figure 25 Help window
The Help file can be located on a PC or on a Web server. It is available on
the MINI-LINK Service Software CD (LZY 214 2358/1) or on the internal Ericsson
web. The help file is named 19089-EN_LZN7120177.<version>.zip or similar and should be unpacked
preserving the internal directory structure.
To install the Help on the local drive:
- Extract the file to C:\.
- Note:
- Make sure the internal directory structure is
preserved. When using WinZip, the Use folder names check box must be
selected in the Extract dialog box.
- The help file will be unpacked
with the following path: C:\MINI-LINK\Documentation\TN_help\ANSI_<revision>\help.html
When installing the Help file on a web server, C: is
replaced by <URL>.
To be able to access the Help, the location of the file must be pointed out.
The location is saved as a cookie in your browser, one for each NE, but it is
sometimes necessary to do a new setup, for example if a new version is
available.
To set up the Help:
- On the Tools menu, click
Help Setup.
- On the Help Setup page, do
one of the following:
- To access
the Help from the PC, click Insert default local path and add ANSI_<revision>/help.html.
- To access
the Help from a Web server, select Insert default server path and add
ANSI_<revision>/help.html.
- Click Apply.
- Note:
- If the Help cannot be accessed, make sure
that cookies are enabled in your browser and that you have typed the correct
path or URL.
- Note:
- A security feature in Internet Explorer 6 SP1
sometimes denies the browser to access the Help file on your PC. Should this
occur do the following in your browser: Click Tools->Internet
Options->Security and add http://<IP address of the NE> as a "Trusted
Site".
This section describes the principles used to denote the NE, plug-in units,
ports and interfaces.
The NE name is specified in the Name box on the System
Configuration page, see Section
11.15. The name is used for example to denote the root in the Navigation
Tree.
Physical entities in the AMM are named as: Name +
Magazine/Position/Port.
For example an NPU1 ANSI in position 11 in an AMM 20p gives the following
names:
- NPU1 ANSI
1/11 for the plug-in unit.
- User Input 1/11/1A for User Input port A on connector 1 on
the plug-in unit.
- DS1 1/11/2A for DS1 port A on connector 2 on the
plug-in unit.
An RAU is denoted in accordance with the MMU it is connected to. For example,
RAU 1/6.1 is connected to MMU2 BA 1/6.
An RMM is denoted in accordance with the NPU where it is inserted. For
example, RMM 1/11.1 is inserted in NPU1
BA 1/11.
Interfaces are named as: Name + Magazine/Position/Port +
Hierarchy Number, where:
- Magazine/Position/Port denotes the port to which the
interface is connected.
- Hierarchy
Number, comprising up to three digits, is used when applicable according
to the following principles:
- It is not
used when there is one-to-one mapping between the interface and the port:
- DS1 1/11/2A denotes the DS1 interface on the port with
the same name.
- Line/Section, APS and
STS-1 are denoted identical to the OC-3/STS-3 port on the LTU 155.
For example Line/Section 1/4/1 on an LTU 155 1/4.
- RAU IF 1/6/1 denotes the radio interface on the MMU2 BA 1/6.
- It is used
to denote contained interfaces as in the following examples:
- The radio
interface RAU IF 1/6/1 contains a DS1 1/6/1 2.
- MUX23 1/6/1 1 contains four MUX12 interfaces denoted
MUX12 1/6/1 1.1, MUX12 1/6/1 1.2 etc.
- MUX12 1/6/1 1.1 contains four DS1 interfaces denoted
DS1 1/6/1 1.1.1, DS1 1/6/1 1.1.2 etc.
- VT1.5 are
denoted using standard SONET KLM numbering. For example STS-1 1/2/1 contains VT1.5 1/2/1
a.b.c where 1
a
3, 1
b
7 and 1
c
3.
- An s at the end of the hierarchy number indicates a DS1 over
a VT1.5. For example DS1 1/8/1 1.2.3s over VT1.5 1/8/1 1.2.3.
The following principles also apply:
- For a protected (1+1) Radio
Terminal with SMU2 ANSI, the interfaces below the two radio interfaces are
denoted in accordance with the identity of the SMU2 ANSI. For example:
- A terminal
comprises MMU2 4-16xDS1 1/6, MMU2 4-16xDS1 1/7 and SMU2 ANSI 1/8. The radio interfaces are denoted RAU IF 1/6/1 and RAU IF
1/7/1. The active RAU IF 1/6/1 holds the SWITCH 1/8/1 interface. A contained DS1 interface is
denoted DS1 1/8/1 1 below both radio
interfaces.
- RF indicates the RAU's interface with an antenna. For
example RF 1/6.1/1 in an RAU
1/6.1 connected to an MMU2 BA 1/6.
- The name of
the protected DS1 interface in a 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection ends with an asterisk
(*). Furthermore, the protected DS1 interface inherits the name of the first
of the two unprotected DS1s. For example:
- The
unprotected DS1 1/3/4A and DS1 1/3/3C interfaces are used to create the
protected DS1 1/3/4A* interface.
- APS
protection follows the same principle as 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection. For example:
- The Line/Section 1/4/1 and Line/Section 1/5/1 interfaces are used to create the
protected APS 1/4/1* interface. The asterisk is
propagated to all contained interface names.
- A PPP
interface over a DS1 gets the same name as the DS1 .
- The two PPP
interfaces in a Radio Terminal are named for example 1/4/1 SC1 and 1/4/1 SC2.
- The PPP
interfaces over OC-3/STS-3 are named for example 1/5/1 MS:D4-6, 1/5/1 MS:D7-9,
1/5/1 MS:D10-12 or 1/5/1
RS:D1-3.
- An ML-PPP
interface is named <near
end IP address> - <far
end IP address>.
- The HDLC
interface is named according to the near end MAC address, for example 00:80:37:89:89:89 - IM.
- The IM
interface gets the name according to its server DS1, for example IM 1/2/1 1.1.
This section contains descriptions of potential EEM related problems that
could occur and instructions how to solve them.
After a software upgrade, there is a possibility that the browser experiences
some graphical layout problems, for example wrong background color for the menu,
wrong tree icons or plug-in unit pictures. This behavior is caused by the
caching mechanism of the browser, often Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6. To solve
this problem you have to clear the cache file of the browser.
To clear the cache file in Internet Explorer:
- On the Tools menu, click
Internet Options.
- In the Internet Options
dialog box, click Delete Files.
- In the Delete Files dialog
box, select the Delete all offline content check box and click
OK.
If the pages in the EEM does not fit within the browser viewing space, you
can put the browser into full screen view. This view minimizes the toolbars,
hides the Windows Taskbar, and maximizes the browser viewing space.
To put the browser into full screen view:
- On the View menu, click
Full Screen. You can also press F11 on the keyboard.
- To go back to the normal view,
press F11 on the keyboard.
You can use the F11 key to toggle back and forth between normal and
full screen view.
MSM 6.5 or later must be installed on the PC in order to completely manage a
Radio Terminal with MMU2. During the installation an association is created
making it possible to launch MSM from the EEM.
Should the launch of MSM fail displaying an error message similar to Error opening file C:\DOCUMENTS AND SETTINGS\ADMINISTRATOR\LOCAL
SETTINGS\TEMPORARY INTERNET FILES\CONTENT.IE5\O5QNCPYN\TEST[1].mxm, you
have to delete the temporary Internet files on your PC.
Should the launch of MSM otherwise fail, reinstall MSM according to the
instructions in MSM Installation Guide.
This section describes the initial setup performed during the installation of
a new NE. The initial setup is done following an installation wizard presented
in the following cases:
- A non-configured NPU2 A/NPU1
BA NE or ATU (B) when connected with an USB cable. You can exit the wizard at
any time by clicking Exit Wizard on the Configuration menu. The
wizard will also be available when the initial setup is finished.
- An NPU1 ANSI
NE in Node Installation mode.
The initial setup includes two major steps:
- Radio
Terminal Configuration, see Section
5.1.
- Configuration of NE Parameters, that is security, DCN, and
system parameters. This can be done in two ways:
- Automatic Configuration using a configuration file, see
Section
5.2.
- Manual Configuration without using a configuration file,
see Section
5.3.
When the initial setup is completed the configuration is continued in Normal
mode, see Section
6.
The Radio Terminal configuration in the installation wizard is a part of the
hardware installation procedure in order to establish communication over a hop.
As a minimum, the Radio Terminals used for DCN communication must be configured
at this stage. The DCN is a requirement for remote configuration of the NE after
the installation. For more information on DCN configuration, see Section
6.11.
The Radio Terminal configuration is started indoors with a station radio
cable connecting the MMU and the RAU. For further instructions, see MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual.
The procedure for configuration of the Radio Terminal depends on the MMU
type:
- Note:
- For NPU2 A/NPU1 BA NE, you can exit the wizard
at any time by clicking Exit Wizard on the Configuration
menu.
To configure a Radio Terminal with MMU2:
- On the Radio Terminal
Configuration page, click Next until Initial setting of MMU2
... appears as a link for the unit you want to configure, and then click
the link. For a protected (1+1) terminal any of the two MMU2s can be selected.
- On the MMU2 Configuration
page, under Protection Mode, select one of the following:
- Prepare
for 1+0 configuration, for a 1+0 terminal.
- Prepare
for 1+1 configuration, for a 1+1 terminal.
Click Apply. The page is reloaded and displays information about
administrative status and notifications for the unit.
- Note:
- The 1+1 configuration is only possible if the
units are placed in adjacent AMM positions according to specifications in
MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual.
- For each unit, select In
Service and clear the Enable check box.
- Click Apply.
- Click Perform AM Setup and Hop
Setup.
- In MSM, perform an AM and Hop
Setup. Follow the instructions in MSM User Guide or MSM online Help. Exit MSM when finished.
- On the MMU2 4-16xDS1
Configuration page , select the Enable check box for all units in
the Radio Terminal and click Apply.
- Repeat the procedure if more
terminals should be configured.
This procedure is followed by outdoor equipment installation, indoor and
outdoor radio cabling, and antenna alignment. Follow the instructions in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual and MINI-LINK TN, MINI-LINK HC, MINI-LINK E Outdoor Installation
Manual.
The initial setup is finished by the configuration of NE parameters, that is
security, DCN and system parameters. This can be done in two ways:
- Automatic
Configuration using a configuration file, see Section
5.2.
- Manual Configuration without using a configuration file,
see Section
5.3.
- Note:
- To configure a protected (1+1) terminal, you
must first configure two temporary unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminals, one for
each MMU that will be part of the final protected terminal.
You can then go Back in the wizard and create a protected terminal
by changing the protection mode of the MMU in the lower position to
1+1. Optionally, you can exit the wizard and then create the protected
terminal as described in Section
6.5.2.
To be able to configure a protected terminal, the following conditions
apply:
- The MMUs must be placed in
adjacent AMM positions according to specifications in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual.
- Both of
the temporary terminals must be configured to use the same traffic capacity,
modulation method, and identity.
- For 1+1
Hot configurations, both RAUs must have the same
frequency.
- For 1+1
Work configurations, both RAUs must have different
frequencies.
- Note:
- For NPU2 A/NPU1 BA, you can exit the wizard at
any time by clicking Exit Wizard on the Configuration
menu.
To configure a Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA:
- On the Radio Terminal
Configuration page, click Next until Initial setting of MMU2
BA/CA [...] appears as a link for the unit you want to configure, and then
click the link.
- Click Perform MMU2 BA/CA
[...] to open the MMU2 BA/CA Configuration page.
- Under ID, type the identity
of this Radio Terminal in the Near End box.
- If this terminal should send
notifications, select the Notifications check box.
- If an alarm should be generated
when the received traffic originates from the wrong far-end, type the expected
far-end identity in the Far End box, and select the Radio ID
Check check box.
- Under Traffic Capacity -
Modulation, select the wanted traffic capacity.
- Under Protection Mode,
select the wanted protection mode.
- Note:
- If you are creating a temporary unprotected
terminal, select 1+0.
- Click Apply to set the protection mode.
- Under BER Alarm Threshold,
select the threshold for generating BER alarms.
- Under Modulation, select
the wanted modulation method.
- Under MMU2 BA/CA
<ID>, select all check boxes.
- Click Apply, then click
Next.
- Click
Perform RAU [...] to open the RAU Configuration page.
- Under Near End Radio Terminal
<ID>, select all check boxes.
- Under RAU <ID>, type
the transmit frequency in the Tx Frequency box.
- Select the Transmitter On
check box.
- In the Tx Attenuator box,
type the value of the fixed attenuator (if used).
- In the Output Power Mode
list, select how the output power is to be controlled.
- Note:
- The ATPC option is only available when
all units in the radio link support ATPC. Click Show ATPC
Capabilities to see which units support ATPC.
- Do one of the following:
- If
RTPC is selected, type the Output Power value.
- If
ATPC is selected, type the Max Output Power and Target
Input Power (far-end) values.
- In the RF Input Alarm
Threshold box, type the threshold for generating RF Input Threshold
alarms.
- Click Apply, then click
Next.
- If you have configured a protected
terminal, click Perform Protection Configuration to open the SWITCH
Protection page.
- Configure the protection as
described in Section
11.44.
- Click Apply, then click
Next.
- Click Next.
- Repeat this procedure if more
terminals should be configured.
- Note:
- When you have configured the two temporary
unprotected terminals, you can go Back in the wizard and create a
protected terminal by changing the protection mode of the MMU in the lower
position to 1+1.
This procedure is followed by outdoor equipment installation, indoor and
outdoor radio cabling, and antenna alignment. Follow the instructions in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual, and MINI-LINK TN, MINI-LINK HC, MINI-LINK E Outdoor Installation
Manual.
The initial setup is finished by the configuration of NE parameters, that is
security, DCN and system parameters. This can be done in two ways:
- Automatic
Configuration using a configuration file, see Section
5.2.
- Manual Configuration without using a configuration file,
see Section
5.3.
This section describes the configuration of NE parameters, using a
configuration file. This always includes configuration of security, DCN and
system parameters. The configuration file could also include the configuration
of plug-in units and interfaces.
The configuration files are located in the <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_backup_configuration folder on
the FTP server. A configuration file is named <hostname>.cfg where <hostname> is typically the name or IP address of an
NE. The file extension .cfg.old is used when a
configuration file is uploaded using a file name that already exists.
- Note:
- For NPU2 A/NPU1 BA, you can exit the wizard at
any time by clicking Exit Wizard on the Configuration
menu.
To configure the NE parameters automatically:
- On the Configuration menu,
click Automatic Configuration.
- On the Automatic
Configuration page, click Download Configuration File.
- On the Load Configuration
page, type the File Name and then click Apply.
- Wait until the configuration has
been downloaded, then click Apply when you have verified that this is
the configuration you want.
If the configuration file requires new software to be loaded, this will be
done automatically. This requires that the software is present in the <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_system_release\ml_tn_software
folder.
A progress bar displays the progress of the software upgrade. When the
download and software upgrade is finished, the NE will make a warm restart.
After the restart you can continue with the configuration of the plug-in units
and their interfaces, see Section
6.
- For an NPU1 ANSI the following
also applies:
After the restart it will run in Normal mode. The IP address of the NE is
changed during the automatic configuration. To start the LCT in Normal mode
you have to enter the URL http://<IP
address> where IP address is typically found in the site
documentation or on the information plate of the NE. See also Section
3.3.2.3.
This section describes the configuration of the NE parameters, without using
a configuration file. This includes configuration of security, DCN and system
parameters.
- Note:
- Make sure the Radio Terminals which will carry
DCN are up and that the antennas are aligned before starting this procedure,
see Section
5.1.
- Note:
- The procedure below may contain steps not
applicable to your configuration.
- Note:
- For NPU2 A/NPU1 BA, you can exit the wizard at
any time by clicking Exit Wizard on the Configuration
menu.
To configure the NE parameters manually:
- On the Configuration menu,
click Manual Configuration.
Performing a Local Software Upgrade
- On the Manual Configuration
page, click Perform Software Upgrade. If a software upgrade is not
required click Next and continue to Step
8.
- On the Software Upgrade -
Installation Wizard page, under Desired Baseline, enter the
Product Number and Release of the new baseline.
- Click Start Upgrade. The
Upgrade Progress - Baseline page monitors the download of the new
software. The page is refreshed every fifth second. When all load modules have
been correctly received, the baseline gets status Upgrade
Finished and the Activate button appears.
- Click Activate. When the
activation is done, the Confirm New System Configuration page is
displayed.
- Note:
- You can check if the restart is finished by
refreshing the page in your browser. While the Web server is down you will
get an error message.
- Click Confirm. The new
baseline is now the active software in the NE.
- Note:
- If you do not confirm the new software
configuration within 15 minutes of the restart, a new restart will occur and
the NE will revert to the previous software configuration.
- Click Next.
Setting Passwords
- On the Manual Configuration page,
click Configure Basic Security.
- On the Security page, under
Set control_user and Set view_user, type Password and
Confirm Password and then click Apply.
- Click Next.
Configuring Basic NE Parameters
- On the Manual Configuration
page, click Configure Basic NE.
- On the Basic NE
Configuration page, under Basic NE Data, type the NE Name.
- Specify NE Location and
NE Contact information, such as the telephone number of the person
responsible.
- Type the
NE IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway of the NE.
- Under FAU Settings, select
In Service for the units to be used.
- Note:
- This step is not applicable for ATU
(B).
- Under General Settings, in
the Date/Time boxes, type the current date (yyyy-mm-dd) and time
(hh:mm:ss).
- Type Alarm Filter Time or
use the default value of 2.5 seconds.
- In the PM Start Time box,
type the time of day that 24 hour performance interval starts or use the
default value 00:00. This time can be set in the range 00:00 - 23:45 in steps
of 15 minutes.
- In the Automatic Backup
list, select where automatic backups of the configuration should be sent.
- Click Apply.
- Click Next.
Configuring DCN Parameters
- On the Manual Configuration
page, click Configure DCN.
- On the LAN/Servers
Configuration page do one of the following:
- Specify Administrative Status of
the LAN interface.
- Select the Enable
Notifications check box if notifications should be sent for the LAN
interface.
- Select the Speed of the
LAN interface and MDI-MDIX.
- Under
SNMP Manager (Trap Receiver), select the Enable Notifications
check box if SNMP traps should be sent to SNMP Managers.
- In the SNMP Manager box,
type the IP address of each SNMP Manager to be used. An SNMP Manager is for
example MINI-LINK Manager.
- In the Port box, for each
SNMP Manager, type the port number that the SNMP Manager uses for SNMP
communication.
- Select SNMP Version for
each SNMP Manager.
- Under Network Services,
type the Domain name
- Type the IP address of each DNS
Server to be used.
- Type the IP address or host name
of the NTP Server.
- Type the DHCP Address or
host name of the DHCP server the NE is a relay for.
- Under FTP, specify the IP address
of the Remote FTP Server, User Name and Password.
- Repeat the previous step for the
Local FTP Server.
- Click Apply.
- On the LAN/Servers
Configuration page, click PPP.
- On the PPP Configuration
page, for each interface, specify the Administrative
Status and Notifications.
- For each numbered interface, type
the IP Address. The box should be left empty for an un-numbered
interface.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
It is recommended to set all interfaces destined to the
same NE as either numbered or un-numbered. Mixing both types may cause
DCN instability.
|
- Click Apply.
Creating Static Routes
- On the PPP Configuration
page, click Static Routing.
- On the Static Routing
Configuration page, type Destination, Route Mask and
Gateway.
- Click Create. The static
route is displayed under Current Static Routes.
- Repeat the two previous steps for
each static route to be created. To modify or delete a static routes, see Section
6.11.4.
- On the Static Routing
Configuration page, click OSPF Areas.
- On the OSPF Areas
Configuration page, type Net Address, Subnet Mask, Area
ID and select Area Type.
- Click Create. The OSPF area
is displayed under Current OSPF Areas.
- Repeat the two previous steps for
each OSPF area to be created. To modify or delete OSPF areas, see Section
6.11.6.
Configuring DCN Over Traffic
- Do one of the following:
- On the DCN Over Traffic page,
select the DCN service mode: DCN over dedicated DS1 or DCN over
channelized DS1 with traffic passthrough.
- Click Apply.
- Under Interface
Settings, in the Unit for DS1 list, select the unit which holds the
DS1 you want to use for DCN.
- Note:
- There are two Interface Settings
groups on the configuration page. It does not matter which of these groups
you use.
- In the DS1 list, select the
DS1 to be used for DCN and click Select.
- Select the Error AIS check
box if AIS should be sent in case of connection failure.
- Note:
- This step is only applicable when DCN over
channelized DS1 with traffic passthrough is selected.
- In the Clock Source list,
select the clock to be used as transmit clock.
- In the Framing list, select
the framing mode and click Select. Go to Step
60 if you selected Unframed.
- Use the Idle Pattern check
boxes to specify the bit pattern for unused timeslots.
- Use the Timeslots check
boxes to specify which timeslots to use for DCN. Timeslots that are already
used for other purposes are not selectable.
- Repeat from Step
53 if you want to use a second DS1 for DCN.
- Click Apply.
- Click Next.
- Go to Step
68.
Configuring DS1 for DCN (NPU1 ANSI NE only)
- On the OSPF Areas Configuration page,
click Next.
- On the Manual Configuration
page, click Configure DS1 DCN.
- On the DS1 DCN
Configuration page, select the DS1 interface to be used for DCN and then
click Apply.
- Note:
- All interfaces are not available at this
stage. When the initial setup is completed, the DS1 DCN Configuration
page can be used to select an DS1 for DCN, see Section
11.52.
- Click Next.
Finishing the Installation
- On the Manual Configuration page,
click Finish Installation.
- On the Finish Installation
page, click OK. This will exit the installation wizard and you can
continue with the configuration of the plug-in units and their interfaces, see
Section
6.
- For NPU1 ANSI the following also
applies:
The NE will make a warm restart. After the restart it will run in Normal
mode. The IP address of the NE is changed during the manual configuration. To
start the LCT in Normal mode you have to enter the URL http://<IP address> where IP
address is the one set in Step
14. See also Section
3.3.2.3.
This section contains information and instructions related to configuration
tasks performed after the initial setup has been completed. It includes the
configuration of plug-in units, Radio Terminals, interfaces, traffic routing,
protection and DCN.
The following is covered:
- Typical
Workflow, see Section
6.1.
- Administrative Status, see Section
6.2.
- Unit Configuration, see Section
6.4.
- Radio Terminal Configuration, see Section
6.5
- Working with APS Protection, see Section
6.6.
- Working with 1+1 DS1 SNCP Protection, see Section
6.7.
- Configuring the Ethernet Bridge, see Section
6.8.
- Working with Traffic Routing of DS1 Interfaces, see Section
6.9.
- Working with DS1 Overview, see Section
6.10.
- DCN Configuration, see Section
6.11.
- Uploading a Configuration File to an FTP Server, see Section
6.12.
- Software Upgrade, see Section
6.13.
- CLI Introduction, see Section
6.14.
When the initial setup is completed, the following steps represent a typical
workflow:
- Configure plug-in units and their
interfaces, see Section
6.4.
- Finalize the configuration of the
Radio Terminals, see Section
6.5.
- Create APS protection, see Section
6.6.1.
- Create 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection,
see Section
6.7.1.
- Configure the Ethernet Bridge
(NPU2 A), see Section
6.8.
- Create traffic routing of DS1
interfaces, see Section
6.9.1.
- Upload a configuration file as
backup to an FTP server, see Section
6.12.
The desired status of a plug-in unit or interface is set as Administrative
Status on the applicable Configuration page.
The signification of the administrative status of a plug-in unit is described
in Table 3.
Table 3
Administrative status of a plug-in unit
|
Administrative status |
Description |
|
In Service |
Sets the unit in operating mode. |
|
Out of Service |
Sets the unit in non-operating mode. All notifications from the unit
and its interfaces are disabled. No active alarms are
displayed. |
The signification of the administrative status of an interface is described
in Table 4.
Table 4
Administrative status of an interface
|
Administrative status |
Description |
|
Up |
Sets the interface in operating mode. |
|
Down |
Sends an AIS instead of traffic on the interface (in both directions).
Notifications from this interface and higher layer interfaces are
suppressed. |
When a new unconfigured plug-in unit is inserted the administrative status of
the unit is In Service and its interfaces are Up by default. The notifications
from the unit and its interfaces will be enabled. However, to prevent too many
alarms from not traffic routed DS1s, notifications are default disabled on these
interfaces.
Depending on which plug-in units are installed, all NEs have a baseline of
features that are available without licenses. If the installed NPU has an RMM,
the set of available features can be expanded by installing licenses that unlock
additional functionality in the NE. Depending on how the equipment was ordered,
licenses can also be pre-installed at delivery.
The process for migrating from MINI-LINK TN R2 to MINI-LINK TN R3 is
described in the document Migration into License
Management, 3/221 02-CSH 109 32/1 Uen
All optional features are indicated by a
icon in the user interface.
This icon only means that this feature is licensed; it is not an indication on
whether a license for this feature is available or not.
When you try to use an optional feature, you may or may not get a warning or
error message. This depends on whether license warnings and errors are set to be
suppressed on this NE. See Section
6.3.10 for instructions on how to suppress warnings and errors.
License warnings are issued whenever you are using an
optional feature without a license; however, the feature can still be used.
Licence errors means that the feature is locked
(disabled) due to missing licenses. In MINI-LINK TN R3, optional
features are never locked. Future releases of MINI-LINK TN may lock
features if licenses are missing.
If you have upgraded the NE to MINI-LINK TN R3, you should create a
license request file and provide it to your local Ericsson representative. See
Section
6.3.4 for instructions on how to create such files.
Licenses are distributed in the form of LKFs which can be stored in those NEs
where additional functionality is required.
An LKF is an XML file that may contain one or more licenses for one or more
optional features. When installed, the LKFs are stored on the Removable Memory
Module (RMM), which is located on the NE NPU. Licenses for a particular feature
may be provided by one or more LKFs.
The LKF is identified by issuer, fingerprint, and sequence number:
- The issuer is the name of the entity that generated the LKF.
The RMM can only store one LKF from each issuer. So, when you store an new LKF
from a current issuer, the licenses on the new LKF replaces the current
licenses from that same issuer.
- The fingerprint is the unique identity of the RMM for which
this LKF was generated. The licenses contained in an LKF can only be used on
an NE if the fingerprint in the LKF matches the RMM fingerprint.
- The sequence number is incremented every time an issuer
generates an LKF for a specific fingerprint. The sequence number of the LKF
you want to store must be higher than the sequence number of the LKF that is
currently stored. This means that it is not possible to install licenses from
older LKFs.
As several LKFs from different issuers can be stored on a single RMM, the
effective set of licenses is the sum of all licenses from all LKFs.
The RMM is the physical media where the License key Files (LKFs) are stored.
Several LKFs, from different issuers, may be stored on the RMM. Every RMM has a
unique fingerprint that is used to confirm that the licenses in an LKF may be
used on the NE where the RMM is installed (the fingerprint is the same as the
Chip S-Nr printed on the RMM). The RMM is installed on the NPU in the
NE.
- Note:
- You cannot install an RMM on an NPU1 ANSI. This
means that there will be no locking of optional features.
Figure
26 shows where the RMM is installed on the different units.

Figure 26 Location of the RMM
The RMM also stores the current configuration of the NE, and the name
implies, the RMM is removable. This means that, if the NPU needs to be replaced,
you can remove the RMM from the old NPU and install it on the new NPU. All
licensed functionality will then automatically work with the new NPU and you can
use the configuration stored on the RMM.
Licenses that where bought in previous releases of MINI-LINK TN are not
bound to individual NEs. Instead, they are registered on a per-customer basis.
To be able to use these licenses in MINI-LINK TN R3, they need to be
transformed into licenses that can be installed on each NE. This transformation
of licenses require that you provide Ericsson with detailed information about
the licenses you need for each individual NE.
To simplify this process, you can create a license request
file for the network or for single NE, after upgrading to
MINI-LINK TN R3. This is an XML file that contains all information
that is needed to do the transformation of licenses. This file should be
provided to your local Ericsson representative who forwards it to the Ericsson
central license register, where it is used to generate one or more LKFs
containing licenses for the NEs.
- Note:
- The following procedure describes how to create
a license request file for a single NE. However, if you are migrating an
entire network, you are recommended to do this as a batch job from
ServiceOn Microwave, or from a version of MINI-LINK Manager that
supports this.
The process for migrating from MINI-LINK TN R2 to MINI-LINK TN R3 is
described in the document Migration into License
Management, 3/221 02-CSH 109 32/1 Uen
To create a licence request file:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Tools menu, click
Licenses, and then click Licences.
- Click Create License
Request.
- In the Quantity column,
specify how many licenses you need for each feature.
The default value in the Quantity column is the difference between
the value in the Installed column and the value in the Used
column. This value cannot be negative.
- Click Save License Request
to save the license request to a file.
To change the set of licenses, you need to download and store one or more
LKFs on the RMM:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Tools menu, click
Licenses, and then click Install Licences.
- Under FTP, do one of the
following:
- If the LKF
resides on a remote FTP server, select Remote server.
- If the LKF
resides on the PC, select Local server. Specify the IP address,
User Name and Password.
The LKF must be located in the tn_ftp_home\tn_licenses folder on the FTP server.
- In the File Name box, type
the file name of the LKF or click Browse to search for the file.
- Click Apply.
- Note:
- If the fingerprint in the LKF does not match
the RMM fingerprint, you will get a warning.
Based on the AMM type and software baseline, the system keeps a list of all
optional features that can be used. The system also keeps track of how many
licenses are installed for each feature and how many of those licenses that are
used.
To see a list of all available optional features, license availability, and
license usage:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Tools menu, click
Licenses, and then click Licences.
A list of available optional features is shown.
The Installed column contains a summary of all installed licenses
from all LKFs on the RMM. The Used column shows how many licenses that
are needed for the current configuration, that is, how many optional features
that are used.
If the value in the Used column is greater than the corresponding
value in the Installed column, the NE is using optional features
without licenses.
If the value in the Used column is less than the corresponding value
in the Installed column, the NE has licenses for unused features.
The Status column shows the status of the licenses for this
feature:
- OK. The feature is supported by the NE and there are no
warnings or errors.
- Not Supported. The feature is not supported by the
current hardware and software configuration.
- Warning. One or more licenses are missing for the
feature.
- Error. One or more licenses are missing for the feature
and the feature is locked.
- New Installed. One or more licenses for the feature have
been installed. The feature will remain in this status until it is used or
until the NE is restarted
Clicking a feature opens a list of installed licenses for that feature, see
Section
6.3.8.
An RMM may store several LKFs, provided they have different issuers.
To see a list of all stored license files:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Tools menu, click
Licenses, and then click Licence File Overview.
A list of all stored LKFs is shown.
Clicking an LKF opens a page where the XML source of the LKF is shown, see
Section
6.3.9.
An LKF may contain licenses for more than one feature, and licenses for one
feature may be contained in several LKFs. The system keeps track of which
licenses are installed from which LKF.
To view a list of features with installed licenses:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Tools menu, click
Licenses, and then click Licence File Inventory.
A list of features with installed licenses is shown.
If several LKFs contains licenses for the same feature, the list will
contain one entry for each LKF. For example, if two LKFs both contains a
license for a specific feature, that feature will appear twice in the
list.
Clicking a feature opens a page where the XML source of the LKF is shown,
see Section
6.3.9.
The LKF is an XML file containing licenses from an issuer. To see the details
of that file, you can view the XML source.
To view the license file details:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Tools menu, click
Licenses, and then click Licence File Overview.
- Click an LKF in the list to see
its XML source.
If you suppress warnings and errors, you can still see the status of the
license usage on the Licenses page, see Section
6.3.6.
To suppress license warnings and errors:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Basic NE.
- Under General Settings,
select if license warnings and errors should be suppressed (hidden).
- Hide
License Warnings disables the warning message shown when trying to use
an optional feature without a license. Also, the warning is not shown in the
Alarm List.
- Hide
License Errors removes the error from the Alarm List. Error
messages will still be displayed when trying to use features without
licenses.
- Click Apply.
- Note:
- This section describes how to configure units
and interfaces not included in a Radio Terminal. The configuration of Radio
Terminals is described in Section
6.5.
To configure a unit or interface:
- In the Navigation Tree,
navigate to and select the entity to configure.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Configuration.
- Configure the entity.
Click Help for information on the configuration options. See also Table
5 to find the applicable configuration page description.
- Click Apply on the configuration page to apply the
changes.
(1)
Configured after both units and their interfaces are configured. See
also Section
6.6.1 on how to create APS protection.
This section describes how to configure a radio terminal. It could be a
completion of a configuration made during the initial setup or a completely new
installation. The procedure is started indoors with a station radio cable
connecting the MMU and the RAU. For further instructions, see MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual.
The following procedures are covered:
- Configuring
an Unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
6.5.1.
- Configuring a Protected (1+1) Radio Terminal with MMU2
BA/CA, see Section
6.5.2.
- Configuring an Unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal with MMU2,
see Section
6.5.3.
- Configuring a Protected (1+1) Radio Terminal with MMU2, see
Section
6.5.4.
- Navigating to Far-End Radio Terminals, see Section
6.5.5
To configure an unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal when the indoor part
comprises one MMU2 BA/CA:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click an MMU2 BA, MMU2 CA.
- Click the Configuration
menu to open the MMU2 BA/CA Configuration page.
- Note:
- Click the Show Far End link to see the
corresponding configuration for the far-end terminal. The far-end is only
available when at least one of its RAUs has operative status In Service.
See Section
11.37 for information on which settings are available from the near-end
EEM. If you want to make changes that are not available from the near-end EEM,
you need to access the EEM for the far-end. See Section
6.5.5 for information on how to do this.
- Under ID, type the identity
of the Radio Terminal in the Near End box.
- If the terminal should send
notifications, select the Notifications check box.
- If an alarm should be generated
when the received traffic originates from the wrong far-end, type the expected
far-end identity in the Far End box, and select the Radio ID
Check check box.
- Under Traffic Capacity -
Modulation, select the wanted traffic capacity, modulation and frame
format. Only possible combinations are listed.
- Under Protection Mode,
select 1+0.
- Select BER Alarm Threshold.
- Under MMU2 BA/CA
<ID>, select all check boxes.
- Click Apply for the
terminals you have changed.
- Under MMU2 BA/CA
<ID>, click the RAU <ID> link to open the RAU
Configuration page.
- Note:
- Click the Show Far End link to see the
corresponding configuration for the far-end terminal. See Section
11.39 for information on which settings are available from the near-end
EEM.
- Under Near End Radio Terminal
<ID>, select all check boxes.
- Under RAU <ID>, type
the transmit frequency in the Tx Frequency box.
- Select the Transmitter On
check box.
- In the Tx Attenuator box,
type the value of the fixed attenuator (if used).
- In the Output Power Mode
list, select how the output power is to be controlled.
If you select ATPC, then ATPC will be enabled on both the near- and
far-end.
- Note:
- The ATPC option is only available when
all units in the radio link support ATPC. Click Show ATPC
Capabilities to see which units support ATPC.
- Do one of the following:
- If
RTPC is selected, type the Output Power value.
- If
ATPC is selected, type the Max Output Power and Target
Input Power (far-end) values.
- In the RF Input Alarm
Threshold box, type the threshold for generating RF Input Threshold
alarms.
- Click Apply for the
terminals you have changed.
- Carry out the outdoor equipment
installation, indoor and outdoor radio cabling, and antenna alignment. Follow
the instructions in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation
Manual and MINI-LINK TN, MINI-LINK E, MINI-LINK HC
Outdoor Installation Manual.
- Configure the applicable
interfaces:
- Note:
- The 1+1 configuration is only possible if the
units are placed in adjacent AMM positions according to specifications in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual.
To configure a protected (1+1) terminal when the indoor part comprises two
MMU2 BA or MMU2 CA units:
- Configure two temporary
unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminals, one for each MMU that will be part of the
final protected terminal, as described in Section
6.5.1.
- Note:
- Do not turn on the transmitters when creating
the temporary terminals.
- Note:
- To be able to configure a protected terminal,
the following conditions apply:
- Both of the temporary
terminals must be configured to use the same traffic capacity, modulation
method, frame format and identity.
- For 1+1
Hot configurations, both RAUs must have the same
frequency.
- For 1+1
Work configurations, both RAUs must have different
frequencies.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the MMU in the lower position.
- Click the Configuration
menu to open the MMU2 BA/CA Configuration page.
- Note:
- Click the Show Far End link to see the
corresponding configuration for the far-end terminal. The far-end is only
available when at least one of its RAUs has operative status In Service.
See Section
11.37 for information on which settings are available from the near-end
EEM. If you want to make changes that are not available from the near-end EEM,
you need to access the EEM for the far-end. See Section
6.5.5 for information on how to do this.
- Under Protection Mode,
select 1+1 Hot or 1+1 Work.
- Click Apply to set the
protection mode.
- Click the Protection Switch
Configuration link to open the SWITCH Protection page.
- Note:
- Click the Show Far End link to see the
corresponding configuration for the far-end terminal. See Section
11.44 for information on which settings are available from the near-end
EEM.
- Configure the protection as
described in Section
11.44, then go back to the MMU2 BA/CA Configuration page.
- In the Fade Notification
Timer box, type how many seconds that faults caused by fading must last
before alarm notifications are sent. The default value is 200 seconds.
- Under
MMU2 BA/CA <ID>, click the RAU <ID> link to open the
RAU Configuration page.
- Note:
- Click the Show Far End link to see the
corresponding configuration for the far-end terminal. See Section
11.39 for information on which settings are available from the near-end
EEM.
- Select the Transmitter On
check box, then click Apply.
- Under Near End radio Terminal <ID>,
click the MMU2 BA/CA <ID> link to return to the MMU2 BA/CA
Configuration page. Repeat from Step
9 to Step
11 for the other RAU.
- Under MMU2 BA/CA
<ID>, , select all check boxes, then click Apply.
- Configure the applicable
interfaces:
To configure an unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal when the indoor part
comprises one MMU2:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click an MMU2.
- Click the Configuration
menu.
- On the
MMU2 Configuration page, select In Service, clear the
Enable check box and select Prepare for 1+0 configuration.
- Click Apply.
- Click Perform AM Setup and Hop
Setup.
- In MSM, perform an AM and Hop
Setup. Follow the instructions in MSM User Guide or MSM online Help. Exit MSM when finished.
- Carry out the outdoor equipment
installation, indoor and outdoor radio cabling, and antenna alignment. Follow
the instructions in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation
Manual and MINI-LINK TN, MINI-LINK HC, MINI-LINK E
Outdoor Installation Manual.
- Configure the applicable
interfaces:
- On the MMU2 Configuration
page, select the Enable check box and click Apply.
- Note:
- The 1+1 configuration is only possible if the
units are placed in adjacent AMM positions according to specifications in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual.
To configure a protected (1+1) Radio Terminal when the indoor part comprises
two MMU2 units and one SMU2:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click one of the MMU2s.
- Click the Configuration
menu.
- On the MMU2 Configuration
page, select Prepare for 1+1 configuration and click Apply.
- For all three units, select In
Service, clear the Enable check box and click Apply.
- Click Perform AM Setup and Hop
Setup.
- In MSM, perform an AM and Hop
Setup. Follow the instructions in MSM User Guide or MSM online Help. Exit MSM when finished.
- Carry out the outdoor equipment
installation, indoor and outdoor radio cabling, and antenna alignment. Follow
the instructions in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation
Manual and MINI-LINK TN, MINI-LINK HC, MINI-LINK E
Outdoor Installation Manual.
- Configure the applicable
interfaces:
- On the
MMU2 Configuration page, select the Enable check box for
all three units and click Apply.
For radio links where the near-end terminal is based on MMU2 or ATU MMU2, you
are able to launch MSM and view the far-end (you need MSM 6.5 or later). The
near-end terminal is shown in the left pane and the far-end terminal is shown in
the right pane. From here you are able to view the alarms in the far-end
radio-terminal, change configuration parameters, set loops, and so on. Section
6.5.3 and Section
6.5.4 describes how to launch MSM for unprotected and protected radio
terminals.
Similarly, if the near-end is based on MMU2 B/C, you can view alarms and
change the configuration of the far-end by clicking the Show Far End link
in the Alarms and Status, MMU2 BA/CA Configuration, RAU
Configuration, and SWITCH Protection pages.
However, if you want to see or change settings that are not available
(read-only or not shown), you must open a second browser and access the far-end
EEM. How to do this depends on the type of MMU in the near-end terminal:
- If the near-end terminal is
based on MMU2 BA/CA, follow the procedure in Section
6.5.5.1.
- If the
near-end terminal is based on MMU2, follow the procedure in Section
6.5.5.2.
To navigate to the far-end terminal:
- In the
Navigation Tree, click an MMU2 BA/CA in the near-end terminal.
- On the Fault menu, click
Alarm and Status.
- Click Show Far End.
- If the far-end is based on MMU2
BA/CA make a note of the slot positions of the MMUs in the far-end.
- Click Launch Far End EEM.
- In the
Enter Network Password dialog box, type the
user name and password, and click OK. For more information see Section
9.1.
- If the far-end is based on MMU2
BA/CA, skip to Step
11.
- In the far-end browser, click the
NE in the Navigation Tree.
- On the Fault menu, first
click DCN, and then click PPP.
- Under Remote IP Address,
find the IP address of the near-end NE. You will find the positions of the
MMUs in the far-end terminal under PPP Name.
- Note:
- If the far-end is a protected terminal based
on MMU2, the position of the SMU2 is listed under PPP
Name.
- In the
Navigation Tree, find the MMUs in the far-end radio terminal.
- Depending on the unit types in the far-end
terminal, do one of the following:
- If the
far-end terminal is based on MMU2, you are now able to able to launch MSM as
described in Section
6.5.3 (unprotected terminals) or Section
6.5.4 (protected terminals).
- If the
far-end terminal is based on MMU2 BA/CA you can access those units as
described in Section
6.5.1 (unprotected terminals) or Section
6.5.2 (protected terminals).
- Note:
- Only MMU2 is described since the procedure for
ATU MMU2 is similar.
To navigate to the far-end terminal:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Fault menu, first
click DCN, and then click PPP.
- Under PPP Name, find the
positions of the MMUs in the near-end terminal. You will find the IP address
of the far-end NE under Remote IP Address. The naming principles of
unit positions are described in Section
4.7.
- Note:
- If the near-end is a protected terminal based
on MMU2, the position of the SMU2 is listed under PPP
Name.
- Open a second (far-end) browser.
- Enter the far-end IP address in
the Address field and then press Enter.
- In the Enter
Network Password dialog box, type the user name and password, and
click OK. For more information see Section
9.1.
- In the far-end browser, click the
NE in the Navigation Tree.
- On the Fault menu, first
click DCN, and then click PPP.
- Under Remote IP Address,
find the IP address of the near-end NE. You will find the positions of the
MMUs in the far-end terminal under PPP Name.
- Note:
- If the far-end is a protected terminal based
on MMU2, the position of the SMU2 ANSI is listed under PPP
Name.
- In the
Navigation Tree, find the MMUs in the far-end radio terminal.
- Depending on the unit types in the
far-end terminal, do one of the following:
- If the
far-end terminal is based on MMU2 you are now able to launch MSM as
described in Section
6.5.3 (unprotected terminals) or Section
6.5.4 (protected terminals).
- If the
far-end terminal is based on MMU2 BA/CA you can access those units as
described in Section
6.5.1 (unprotected terminals) or Section
6.5.2 (protected terminals).
This section describes how to create, modify and delete APS protection.
This procedure describes how to create APS protection including two adjacent
LTU 155 ANSIs. Each unit's OC-3/STS-3 port will have the status MSP 1+1 VC-12.
- Note:
- The two LTU 155 ANSIs must be placed in
adjacent AMM positions according to specifications in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual..
- Note:
- Creating APS protection will remove the
existing traffic routings on the LTU 155 ANSI.
To create MSP protection:
- Make sure that both units and
their interfaces are configured, see Section
6.4.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click one of the two LTU 155 ANSIs.
- Click the Configuration
menu.
- On the LTU 155 ANSI
Configuration page, under Port Configuration, click APS
Protection.
- On the Create APS
Protection page, click OK.
- The selected LTU 155 ANSI
along with its adjacent unit will be configured to operate together as a
protected pair, in an APS protection. During the process it is indicated how
many units (0,1 or 2) that have been configured so far. The page is refreshed
every fifth second to give up-to-date information about the progress.
- When the APS protection has been
created the Modify APS Protection page is displayed.
To verify or change the configuration of the APS protection do the
following:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the APS interface found below one of the LTU 155 ANSIs.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Configuration. The APS Configuration page is displayed,
where the configuration can be changed.
This procedure describes how to change active line and switch mode for an
existing APS protection, including two adjacent LTU 155 ANSI units.
To modify APS protection:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click one of the two LTU 155 ANSIs.
- Click the Configuration
menu.
- On the LTU 155 ANSI
Configuration page, under Port Configuration, click APS
Protection.
- On the Modify MSP
Protection page, change Active Line and/or Switch Mode.
- Click Apply.
This procedure describes how to delete an existing MSP protection, including
two adjacent LTU 155s. Deleting MSP protection will set the status of each
unit's STM-1port to Not Configured, that is the port does
not provide traffic until it is configured using the LTU 155
Configuration page, see Section
11.34.
To delete MSP protection:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click one of the two LTU 155s.
- Click the Configuration
menu.
- On the LTU 155
Configuration page, under Port Configuration, click MSP
Protection.
- On the Modify APS
Protection page, change the status for both units to Not
Configured.
- Click OK.
- The selected LTU 155 ANSI
along with its adjacent unit will be set to operate alone. During the process,
the Deleting APS Protection page indicates how many units (0,1 or 2)
that have been configured so far. The page is refreshed every fifth second to
give up-to-date information about the progress.
- Note:
- If you leave the Deleting Protection
page during the process and then enter it later, you have to re-specify the
status of the second unit's OC-3/STS-3 port.
- When the MSP protection has been
deleted the LTU 155 ANSI Configuration page is displayed.
This section describes how to create, modify and delete 1+1 DS1 SNCP
protection using the EEM.
- Note:
- If MINI-LINK Connexion is used to provision
end-to-end DS1 connections, then only use the EEM to view current connections. Creating, modifying, and deleting
DS1 connections shall in this case be done with MINI-LINK
Connexion.
Protection of DS1 interfaces can be created in two ways:
- Using the
Matrix View, see Section
6.7.1.1. One interface pair can be protected at a time.
- Using the List View, see Section
6.7.1.2. One or multiple interface pairs can be protected
simultaneously.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click 1+1 DS1 SNCP.
- On the 1+1 DS1 SNCP Select
Interfaces page, under Interface Type, select DS1 and then
click Select.
- Note:
- This version of EEM supports only selection
of DS1.
- Under Select units for
interface views, select the two units, one from each list, that contain
the interfaces to be protected.
- Click Matrix View.
- On the 1+1 DS1 SNCP Matrix
View page, click the blank button
in the
intersection point between the two interfaces to be protected. This creates a
protection with default settings indicated by a P button
in the intersection point.
You can use an interface interval link
to locate
interfaces currently not present on an axis. The interfaces on an MMU2 in a
protected (1+1) Radio Terminal are denoted in accordance with the SMU2
ANSI.
- Note:
- If there is no blank button in the
intersection point, the two interfaces cannot be used. To find out why,
click the interface names to display the DS1 Overview page. The
possible reasons can be summarized as follows:
- One or both of the
interfaces are already part of a 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection.
- Both
interfaces are already routed.
- The
interface is used for DCN.
To modify the protection, route the protected interface or modify a traffic
routing of the protected interface (optional):
- Click the P button
.
- On the Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP
page, do one of the following:
- To modify
the protection:
- Specify the protection
parameters. Clicking Configure <Protected DS1 Interface Name>
opens the DS1 Configuration page where you
can specify the parameters for the protected interface. Use the
Back button to navigate back.
- Click OK. The 1+1 DS1
SNCP Matrix View page is displayed.
- To route
the protected interface:
- Under Traffic Routing,
click Create.
- On the Traffic Routing List
View page, select the interface to be routed to (Interface 2)
and then click Create.
- On the Create Traffic
Routing page, type the Name of the traffic routing and then
click OK. The Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page is displayed.
- To modify
a traffic routing of the protected interface:
- Note:
- This case will occur if one of the
interfaces in the protection was routed. The protected interface will then
inherit the traffic routing.
- Under Traffic Routing,
click Modify.
- On the Modify Traffic
Routing page, type the Name of the traffic routing and click
OK. The Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page is
displayed.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click 1+1 DS1 SNCP.
- On the 1+1 DS1 SNCP Select
Interfaces page, under Interface Type, select DS1 and then
click Select.
- Note:
- This version of EEM supports only selection
of DS1.
- Under Select units for
interface views, select the units, one unit or All Units from each list,
that contain the interfaces to be protected.
- Click List View.
- On the 1+1 DS1 SNCP List
View page, select one or multiple interface pairs to be protected. When
selecting multiple items, the topmost selected interfaces in the two lists
will form an interface pair and so on. Use CTRL or SHIFT to select multiple
items.
- Note:
- The interfaces on an MMU2 in a protected
(1+1) Radio Terminal are denoted in accordance with the SMU2
ANSI.
- Click Create and do one of
the following:
- To create
a single 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection:
- On the Create 1+1 DS1
SNCP page, under Interfaces, select the Active
interface.
- Under Settings, specify
Hold-Off Time and Switch Mode.
- Click OK.
- To create
multiple 1+1 DS1 SNCP protections: On the Create Multiple 1+1 DS1
SNCP page, click OK. This will create the protections with
default settings which can be changed later by modifying an existing
protection.
- The 1+1 DS1 SNCP List View
page is displayed. Click Show Current Protections to display the
Current Protections list.
To modify a protection, route the protected interface or modify a traffic
routing of the protected interface (optional):
- Locate the protection and click
Modify.
- On the Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP
page, do one of the following:
- To modify
the protection:
- Specify the protection
parameters. Clicking Configure <Protected DS1 Interface Name>
opens the DS1 Configuration page where you
can specify the parameters for the protected interface. Use the
Back button to navigate back.
- Click OK. The 1+1 DS1
SNCP List View page is displayed.
- To route
the protected interface:
- Under Traffic Routing,
click Create.
- On the Traffic Routing List
View page, select the interface to be routed to (Interface 2)
and then click Create.
- On the Create Traffic
Routing page, type the Name of the traffic routing and then
click OK. The Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page is displayed.
- To modify
a traffic routing of the protected interface:
- Note:
- This case will occur if one of the
interfaces in the protection was routed. The protected interface will then
inherit the traffic routing.
- Under Traffic Routing,
click Modify.
- On the Modify Traffic
Routing page, type the Name of the traffic routing and click
OK. The Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page is
displayed.
Existing protection of DS1 interfaces can be modified, that is change the
protection parameters or route the protected interface, or deleted in two
ways:
- Using the
Matrix View, see Section
6.7.2.1. One protection can be handled at a time.
- Using the List View, see Section
6.7.2.2. One protection can be modified and multiple protections can be
deleted simultaneously.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click 1+1 DS1 SNCP.
- On the 1+1 DS1 SNCP Select
Interfaces page, under Interface Type, select DS1 and then
click Select.
- Note:
- This version of EEM supports only selection
of DS1.
- Under Select units for
interface views, select the two units, one from each list, that contain
the interfaces in the protection.
- Click Matrix View.
- On the 1+1 DS1 SNCP Matrix
View page, click the P button
in the intersection point
between the two interfaces in the protection.
- Note:
- You can use an interface interval link
to locate
interfaces currently not present on an axis.
- Note:
- The interfaces on an MMU2 in a protected
(1+1) Radio Terminal are denoted in accordance with the SMU2
ANSI.
- On the Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP
page do one of the following:
- To modify
the protection:
- Specify the protection
parameters. Clicking Configure <Protected DS1 Interface Name>
opens the DS1 Configuration page where you
can specify the parameters for the protected interface. Use the
Back button to navigate back.
- Click OK. The 1+1 DS1
SNCP Matrix View page is displayed reflecting your changes.
- To delete
the protection:
- Click Delete.
- Click OK in the
confirmation dialog box. The 1+1 DS1 SNCP Matrix View page is
displayed reflecting your changes.
- To route
the protected interface:
- Under Traffic Routing,
click Create.
- On the Traffic Routing List
View page, select the interface to be routed to (Interface 2)
and then click Create.
- On the Create Traffic
Routing page, type the Name of the traffic routing and then
click OK. The Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page is displayed.
- To modify
a traffic routing of the protected interface:
- Under Traffic Routing,
click Modify.
- On the Modify Traffic
Routing page, type the Name of the traffic routing and click
OK. The Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page is
displayed.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click 1+1 DS1 SNCP.
- On the 1+1 DS1 SNCP Select
Interfaces page, under Interface Type, select DS1 and then
click Select.
- Note:
- This version of EEM supports only selection
of DS1.
- Under Select units for
interface views, select the two units, one unit or All Units from each
list, that contain the interfaces in the protection.
- Click List View.
- On the 1+1 DS1 SNCP List
View page, click Show Current Protections to display the Current
Protections list.
- Under Current Protections,
do one of the following:
- To modify
a protection:
- Locate the protection and click
Modify.
- On the Modify 1+1 DS1
SNCP page, specify the protection parameters. Clicking Configure
<Protected DS1 Interface Name> opens the DS1 Configuration page where you can specify the
parameters for the protected interface. Use the Back button to
navigate back.
- Click OK. The 1+1 DS1
SNCP List View page is displayed reflecting your changes.
- To delete
one or multiple protections:
- Select the check boxes for the
protections to be deleted and click Delete.
- Click OK in the
confirmation dialog box. The 1+1 DS1 SNCP List View page is
displayed reflecting your changes.
- Note:
- You can also delete a single protection
from the Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page.
- To route
the protected interface:
- Under Traffic Routing,
click Create.
- On the Traffic Routing List
View page, select the interface to be routed to (Interface 2)
and then click Create.
- On the Create Traffic
Routing page, type the Name of the traffic routing and then
click OK. The Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page is displayed.
- To modify
a traffic routing of the protected interface:
- Under Traffic Routing,
click Modify.
- On the Modify Traffic
Routing page, type the Name of the traffic routing and click
OK. The Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page is
displayed.
- Note:
- The interfaces on an MMU2 in a protected
(1+1) Radio Terminal are denoted in accordance with the SMU2
ANSI.
The procedure for setting up the Ethernet Bridge is different depending on
which unit that is used for the bridge. Follow the following procedures for the
unit you want to set up:
If an ETU2 is inserted into an AMM 2p, you can configure the Ethernet Bridge
on both units.
This section describes how to configure the Ethernet Bridge, implemented in
the ETU2. A maximum of 16 DS1s can be used for transmission of Ethernet
traffic.
- In the Navigation Tree,
expand the ETU2 and then click a Bridge interface.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Configuration.
- On the Bridge Configuration
page, under Units, select the unit that contain the DS1s to be bridged
and click Select.
- Under Interfaces, select
the DS1s that should be bridged and click Add. Use CTRL or SHIFT to
select multiple items.
- If the DS1s to be bridged belong
to more than one unit, repeat the two previous steps.
- If DS1s should be removed do the
following:
Under IM Group Interfaces, select the DS1s to be removed and click
Remove.
- Under IM Group, set the
configuration options for the IM Group interface. See Section
11.30 for information on the options.
- Under Bridge, set the
options for the Bridge interface. See Section
11.30 for information about the options.
- Click Apply.
This section describes how to configure the Ethernet Bridge, implemented in
the NPU2 A. A maximum of 16 DS1s can be used for transmission of Ethernet
traffic.
To configure the Ethernet Bridge:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Ethernet Bridge.
- On the Ethernet Bridge
Configuration page, under Units, select the unit that contain the
DS1s to be bridged and click Select.
- Under Interfaces, select
the DS1s that should be bridged and click Add. Use CTRL or SHIFT to
select multiple items.
- If the DS1s to be bridged belongs
to more than one unit, repeat the two previous steps.
- If DS1s should be removed do the
following:
Under Bridged Interfaces, select the DS1s to be removed and click
Remove.
- Select the Enable check box
if alarm notifications should be sent for the bridge's HDLC encapsulation
interface.
- Under Bridge, set the
options for the Bridge interface. See Section
11.29 for information about the options.
- Click Apply.
This section describes how to create, modify and delete traffic routing of
DS1 interfaces.
- Note:
- If MINI-LINK Connexion is used to provision
end-to-end DS1 connections, then only use the EEM to view current connections. Creating, modifying, and deleting
DS1 connections shall in this case be done with MINI-LINK
Connexion.
Traffic routing of DS1 interfaces can be done in two ways:
- Using the
Matrix View, see Section
6.9.1.1. One interface pair can be routed at a time.
- Using the List View, see Section
6.9.1.2. One or multiple interface pairs can be routed
simultaneously.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Traffic Routing.
- On the Traffic Routing Select
Interfaces page, under Interface Type, select DS1 and then
click Select.
- Under Select units for
interface views, select the two units, one from each list, that contain
the interfaces to be routed.
- Click Matrix View.
- On the Traffic Routing Matrix
View page, click the blank button
in the
intersection point between the two interfaces to be routed. This creates a
nameless traffic routing indicated by an X button
in the intersection point.
- Note:
- You can use an interface interval link
to locate
interfaces currently not present on an axis.
- Note:
- If there is no blank button in the
intersection point the two interfaces cannot be used. To find out why, click
the interface names to display the DS1 Overview page. The possible
reasons can be summarized as follows:
- One or both of the
interfaces are already routed or part of a 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection where
the protected interface is already routed.
- The two
interfaces are part of the same 1+1 DS1 SNCP
protection.
- Note:
- The interfaces on an MMU2 in a protected
(1+1) Radio Terminal are denoted in accordance with the SMU2
ANSI.
To name the traffic routing (optional):
- Click the X button
to modify the traffic routing.
- On the Modify Traffic
Routing page, type the Name and then click OK. The
Traffic Routing Matrix View page will be opened.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Traffic Routing.
- On the Traffic Routing Select
Interfaces page, under Interface Type, select DS1 and then
click Select.
- Under Select units for
interface views, select the two units, one unit or All Units from each
list, that contain the interfaces to be routed.
- Click List View.
- On the Traffic Routing List
View page, select one or multiple interface pairs to be routed. When
selecting multiple items, the topmost selected interfaces in the two lists
will form one interface pair and so on. Use CTRL or SHIFT to select multiple
items.
- Note:
- The interfaces on an MMU2 in a protected
(1+1) Radio Terminal are denoted in accordance with the SMU2
ANSI.
- Click Create and do one of
the following:
- On the
Create Traffic Routing page, type the Name of the single
traffic routing and then click OK.
- On the
Create Multiple Traffic Routing page, type the common Name of
the multiple traffic routings and then click OK. An individual name
can be set later by modifying an existing traffic routing.
- The Traffic Routing List View
page is displayed. Click Show Current Routings to display the
Current Traffic Routings list.
Existing traffic routing of DS1 interfaces can be modified or deleted in two
ways:
- Using the
Matrix View, see Section
6.9.2.1. One traffic routing can be handled at a time.
- Using the List View, see Section
6.9.2.2. One traffic routing can be modified and multiple traffic routings
can be deleted simultaneously.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Traffic Routing.
- On the Traffic Routing Select
Interfaces page, under Interface Type, select DS1 and then
click Select.
- Under Select units for
interface views, select the two units, one from each list, that contain
the interfaces in the traffic routing.
- Click Matrix View.
- On the Traffic Routing Matrix
View page, click the X button
in the intersection point
between the two interfaces in the traffic routing.
- Note:
- You can use an interface interval link
to locate
interfaces currently not present on an axis.
- Note:
- The interfaces on an MMU2 in a protected
(1+1) Radio Terminal are denoted in accordance with the SMU2
ANSI.
- On the Modify Traffic
Routing page, do one of the following:
- Modify the
Name of the traffic routing and click OK.
- Click
Delete and then click OK in the confirmation dialog
box.
- The Traffic Routing Matrix
View page is displayed reflecting your changes.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Traffic Routing.
- On the Traffic Routing Select
Interfaces page, under Interface Type, select DS1 and then
click Select.
- Under Select units for
interface views, select the two units, one unit or All Units from each
list, that contain the interfaces in that are routed.
- Click List View.
- On the Traffic Routing List
View page, click Show Current Routings to display the Current
Traffic Routings list.
- Under Current Traffic
Routings do one of the following:
- To modify
a traffic routing
- Locate the traffic routing and
click Modify.
- On the Modify Traffic
Routing page, modify the Name of the traffic routing and click
OK.
- To delete
one or multiple traffic routings:
- Select the check boxes for the
traffic routings to be deleted and click Delete.
- Click OK in the
confirmation dialog box.
- Note:
- You can also delete a single traffic
routing from the Modify Traffic Routing page.
- Note:
- The interfaces on an MMU2 in a protected
(1+1) Radio Terminal are denoted in accordance with the SMU2
ANSI.
- The Traffic Routing List
View page is displayed reflecting your changes.
The DS1 Overview page is opened in a separate window and provides a
convenient way to view and change the configuration of an DS1 interface, as well
as handle its 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection and traffic routing. Furthermore, it is
possible to handle the DS1 as part of the Ethernet Bridge, implemented in the
NPU2 A.
This section covers the following procedures:
- Configuring
an DS1, Creating 1+1 DS1 SNCP Protection and Traffic Routing, see Section
6.10.1.
- Adding an DS1 to the Ethernet Bridge, see Section
6.10.2.
This procedure describes how to use the main features of the DS1
Overview page, excluding the Ethernet Bridge handling. The different parts
of the procedure can also be used standalone, when applicable.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click an DS1 that is neither protected nor routed.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Configuration.
- On the DS1 Configuration
page, view the parameters at hand. If required, make changes and click
Apply.
- Click DS1 Overview to open
the DS1 Overview page in a separate window. The upper part of the page
displays the configuration of the DS1 for which the page is opened. The lower
part is a graphical view used to display and change protection and traffic
routing related to this DS1.
- Note:
- The upper part of the page will have links to
the DS1 Configuration page for all DS1s related to the one for which
the page is opened. Use these links to change the configuration, if
required.
- On the DS1 Overview page, click
Create 1+1 DS1 SNCP. The 1+1 DS1 SNCP List View page is opened
in the main EEM browser window. The DS1 for which the DS1 Overview page
is opened is preselected in the Interface 1 list. The
Interface 2 list contains all available DS1s that can be used to
create a protection.
- On the 1+1 DS1 SNCP List
View page, under Interface 2, select an DS1 and click
Create.
- On the Create 1+1 DS1 SNCP
page, define Hold-Off Time and Switch Mode. Click Apply.
- On the DS1 Overview page, click
Reload. The page is now updated with an SNCP symbol for the new
protection. The configuration of the two unprotected and the protected DS1 s
are also displayed in the upper part of the page.
- On the DS1 Overviewpage,
click Create Traffic Routing.
- The Traffic Routing List
View page is opened in the main EEM browser window. The protected DS1 is
preselected in the Interface 1 list. The Interface 2
list contains all available DS1 s that can be used to create a traffic
routing.
- On
the Traffic Routing List View page, under Interface 2, select an
DS1 and click Create.
- On the Create Traffic
Routing page, specify a Name of the traffic routing and click
Apply.
- On the DS1 Overviewpage,
click Reload. The page is now updated with a Traffic Routing symbol.
The configuration of the DS1 selected under Interface 2 is also
displayed in the upper part of the page.
- If the DS1 selected under
Interface 2 in Step
11 in Section 6.10.1 should be protected as well, repeat Step
5 in Section 6.10.1 to Step
8 in Section 6.10.1 above. This protection will be displayed with an SNCP
symbol to the right. The configuration of the DS1s in this protection is also
displayed in the upper part of the page.
The DS1 Overview page displays if an DS1 is used for the Ethernet
Bridge, implemented in ETU2, NPU2. If not, the DS1 can be added. See also how to
configure the Ethernet Bridge in Section
6.8.
To add an DS1 to the Ethernet Bridge:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click an DS1 that is not used for the Ethernet Bridge.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Configuration.
- On the DS1 Configuration
page, view the parameters at hand. If required, make changes and click
Apply.
- Click DS1 Overview to open
the DS1 Overview page in a separate window.
- On the DS1 Overview page,
click Add DS1 to Ethernet Bridge.
- The Ethernet Bridge
Configuration page is opened in the main EEM browser window. The selected
DS1 and the unit containing it are preselected.
- On the Ethernet Bridge
Configuration page, click Add. The DS1 is added to the Bridged
Interfaces list.
- On the DS1 Overview page,
click Reload. The Ethernet Bridge symbol is now displayed.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click an DS1 that is not used for the Ethernet Bridge.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Configuration.
- On the DS1 Configuration
page, view the parameters at hand. If required, make changes and click
Apply.
- Click DS1 Overview to open
the DS1 Overview page in a separate window.
- On the DS1 Overview page,
click Add DS1 to Ethernet Bridge.
- The Ethernet Bridge
Configuration page is opened in the main EEM browser window. The selected
DS1 and the unit containing it are preselected.
- On the Ethernet Bridge
Configuration page, click Add. The DS1 is added to the Bridged
Interfaces list.
- On the DS1 Overview page,
click Reload. The Ethernet Bridge symbol is now displayed.
This section covers general information and procedures related to the Data
Communication Network (DCN), providing IP based transport of operation and
maintenance data between management systems and MINI-LINK TN equipment.
The DCN parameters are normally set during the initial setup but can also be
changed later following procedures in this section.
Each NE holds an internal IP router using numbered and un-numbered
interfaces. PPP interfaces configured for an Area Border Router (ABR) use
numbered interfaces. All other interfaces are un-numbered, that is inheriting
the IP address of the router.
Basic DCN parameters, such as IP address and default gateway, are set during
the initial setup, see Section
5.3. These parameters can always be changed from the LAN/Servers
Configuration page, see Section
11.16.
The preferred IP routing strategy for MINI-LINK TN is the Open Shortest Path
First (OSPF) protocol, which makes use of automatically updated routing tables
in order to determine the most efficient transmission of data. The OSPF areas
can be created during the initial setup or at a later occasion, see Section
6.11.5. The Command Line Interface (CLI) is used for advanced OSPF
configuration and troubleshooting, see Section
6.14.3.
MINI-LINK TN supports static routing from the EEM. Static routing can be
configured during the initial setup or at a later occasion, see Section
6.11.3. The CLI also provides configuration of static routing, see Section
6.14.4.
The available DCN channels are briefly described below.
| DS1 |
|
One DS1 interface per NPU1 ANSI NE
and up to two DS1 interfaces per NPU1 BA/NPU2 A NE can be used for
transport of DCN traffic. The interfaces can be selected during the
initial setup, see Section
5.3. It is also possible to select the interface from the DS1
Configuration page, see Section
11.52. |
|
| Radio Terminal |
|
An unprotected (1+0) protected or
protected (1+1) Radio Terminal provides two 64 kbit/s PPP interfaces by
default. |
|
| OC-3/STS-3 |
|
The OC-3/STS-3 interface
(stand-alone or APS) on the LTU 155 ANSI provides PPP interfaces in
the RSOH and MSOH bytes of the SONET frame. The default bandwidth is
DCCR=192 kbit/s and DCCM=192 kbit/s. The bandwidth
can be changed, see Section
6.11.2.1. |
|
| LAN |
|
The LAN interface on the NPU can be
used to connect to an external DCN. The NPU 8x2 provides
10 Mbit/s. For NPU2/NPU1 B it is possible to configure the interface
to 10 or 100 Mbit/s on the LAN/Servers Configuration page, see Section
11.16.
For ATU (B), the LAN interface is used to connect to an external DCN.
It is possible to configure this 10 Mbit/s interface on the LAN/Servers
Configuration page, see Section
11.16. |
|
| DIG SC |
|
The SMU2 ANSI in co-siting mode
provides 2x64 kbit/s channels for DCN connection, typically to co-sited
MINI-LINK E equipment, see Section
6.11.2.2. |
|
For more specific information on DCN for MINI-LINK, see MINI-LINK DCN Guideline.
This section describes how to configure the PPP interfaces. They can
specifically be used to change the default bandwidth of the OC-3/STS-3 PPP
interfaces and to set the number of DIG SC (2x64 kbit/s) for SMU2 ANSI in
co-siting mode.
To configure the PPP interfaces:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click DCN and then click PPP.
- On the PPP Configuration
page, for each interface, specify the Administrative
Status and Notifications.
- For a numbered interface, type the
IP Address. The box should be left empty for an un-numbered interface.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
It is recommended to set all interfaces destined to the
same NE as either numbered or un-numbered. Mixing both types may cause
DCN instability.
|
- Click Apply.
The OC-3/STS-3 interface (stand-alone or APS) on the LTU 155 provides PPP
interfaces in the RSOH and MSOH bytes of the SONET frame. Table
7 and Table
9 show the possible and default bandwidth of the interfaces.
For increased bandwidth it is recommended
to change the administrative status of the interfaces in accordance with the
tables.
Table 6
Bandwidth of the STM-1 RSOH PPP interfaces
|
Bandwidth [kbit/s] |
DCCR (D1-3) status |
|
0 |
Down |
|
192 |
Up
(Default) |
Table 7
Bandwidth of the OC-3/STS-3 RSOH PPP interfaces
|
Bandwidth [kbit/s] |
DCCR (D1-3) status |
|
0 |
Down |
|
192 |
Up
(Default) |
Table 8
Bandwidth of the STM-1 MSOH PPP interfaces
|
Bandwidth [kbit/s] |
DCCM (D4-6) status |
DCCM (D7-9) status |
DCCM (D10-12) status |
|
0 |
Down |
Down |
Down |
|
192 |
Up (Default) |
Down |
Down |
|
384 |
Up |
Up |
Down |
|
576 |
Up |
Up |
Up |
Table 9
Bandwidth of the OC-3/STS-3 MSOH PPP interfaces
|
Bandwidth [kbit/s] |
DCCM (D4-6) status |
DCCM (D7-9) status |
DCCM (D10-12) status |
|
0 |
Down |
Down |
Down |
|
192 |
Up (Default) |
Down |
Down |
|
384 |
Up |
Up |
Down |
|
576 |
Up |
Up |
Up |
The SMU2 ANSI in co-siting mode provides 2x64 kbit/s channels for DCN
connection, typically to co-sited MINI-LINK E equipment. If a channel should be
used, the administrative status of the interface must be set to Up.
Static routing means that a fixed routing scheme is used where the address of
the router that a message will be sent to, has to be entered manually. A maximum
of 100 static routes is possible.
To create a static route:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click DCN and then click Static Routing.
- On the Static Routing
Configuration page, type Destination, Route Mask and
Gateway.
- Click Create. The static
route is displayed under Current Static Routes.
See also Section
6.14.4 on how to use the CLI to create static routes.
To modify or delete an existing static route:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click DCN and then click Static Routing.
- On the Static Routing
Configuration page, under Current Static Routes, do one of the
following:
- To modify
a route:
- Locate the route and click
Modify.
- On the Modify Static
Route page, specify the new parameters and click OK.
- To delete
one or multiple routes:
- Select the check boxes for the
route to be deleted and click Delete.
- Click OK in the
confirmation dialog box.
- Note:
- You can also delete a single route area
from the Modify Static Route page.
- The Static Routing
Configuration page is displayed reflecting your changes.
The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol makes use of automatically
updated routing tables in order to determine the most efficient transmission of
data. OSPF networks are divided in sections, so called OSPF areas. The EEM can
be used to create OSPF areas as described below. If there is only one ABR within
an area, it is recommended to define the area as a stub area in order to improve
the performance of the routing.
To create an OSPF area:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click DCN and then click OSPF Areas.
- On the OSPF Areas
Configuration page, type Net Address, Subnet Mask, Area
ID and select Area Type.
- Click Create. The OSPF area
is displayed under Current OSPF Areas.
To modify or delete an existing OSPF area:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click DCN and then click OSPF Areas.
- On the OSPF Areas
Configuration page, under Current OSPF Areas, do one of the
following:
- To modify
an OSPF area:
- Locate the OSPF area and click
Modify.
- On the Modify OSPF Area
page, specify the new parameters and click OK.
- To delete
one or multiple OSPF areas:
- Select the check boxes for the
OSPF areas to be deleted and click Delete.
- Click OK in the
confirmation dialog box.
- Note:
- You can also delete a single OSPF area from
the Modify OSPF Area page.
- The OSPF Areas
Configuration page is displayed reflecting your changes.
Two unframed or framed (channelized) DS1s can be used for transport of DCN
data. It can be a fixed DS1 connected to an NPU1 BA, NPU2 A or LTU, an DS1
transported in an OC-3/STS-3 frame or an DS1 transported over a radio link.
The DCN data can be transported over a dedicated DS1 or use spare timeslots
in an DS1 used for traffic. Depending on framing, a complete 2 Mbit/s or up to
31 timeslots can be used for DCN for the selected DS1s.
To use a dedicated DS1 for DCN:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click DCN and then click DCN Over Traffic.
- On the DCN Over Traffic
page, select DCN over dedicated DS1.
- Under Interface Settings, in the
Unit for DS1 list, select the unit that holds the DS1 you want to use
for DCN, then click Apply.
- Note:
- There are two Interface Settings
groups on the configuration page. It does not matter which of these groups
you use.
- In the DS1 list, select the
DS1 to be used for DCN and click Select.
- In the Clock Source list,
select the clock to be used as transmit clock.
- In the Framing list, select
the framing mode and click Select. Go to Step
10 if you selected Unframed.
- Use the Idle Pattern check
boxes to specify the bit pattern for unused timeslots.
- Use the Timeslots check
boxes to specify which timeslots to use for DCN. Timeslots that are already
used for other purposes are not selectable.
- Repeat from Step
4 if you want to use a second DS1 for DCN.
- Click Apply.
To use spare timeslots in an DS1 used for traffic:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click DCN and then click DCN Over Traffic.
- On the DCN Over Traffic
page, select DCN over channelized DS1 with traffic pass-through..
- Under Interface Settings, in
the Unit for DS1 list, select the unit that holds the DS1 you want to
use for DCN, then click Apply.
- Note:
- There are two Interface Settings
groups on the configuration page. It does not matter which of these groups
you use.
- In the DS1 list, select the
DS1 to be used for DCN and click Select.
- Select the Error AIS check
box if AIS should be sent in case of connection failure.
- In the Timing list, select
the timing mode.
- In the Framing list, select
the framing mode and click Select.
- Use the Idle Pattern check
boxes to specify the bit pattern for unused timeslots.
- Use the Timeslots check
boxes to specify which timeslots to use for DCN. Timeslots that are already
used for other purposes are not selectable.
- Repeat from Step
4 if you want to use a second DS1 for DCN.
- Click Apply.
To modify or delete :
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click DCN and then click DCN Over Traffic.
- On the DCN Over Traffic
page, do one of the following:
- To delete
DCN Over Traffic: Under Interface Settings, next to the DS1
list, click Delete
- Note:
- There are two Interface Settings
groups on the configuration page.
- To modify
DCN Over Traffic: Specify new parameters for the DS1 you want to modify and
click Apply.
- Note:
- If you want to change the mode, for example
change from using a dedicated DS1 to using timeslots, you first need to
delete the current DCN Over Traffic configuration. After that you can
configure DCN Over Traffic as usual.
This procedure describes how to upload a configuration file to an FTP Server
for backup purposes.
- Note:
- It is recommended to carry out this procedure
when the installation and configuration of a new NE is completed.
To upload a configuration file:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Load Configuration.
- On the Load Configuration
page, under Configuration File, select Upload to FTP server.
- Specify File Name. The
configuration will be stored in the <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_backup_configuration folder.
- Under FTP, do one of the
following:
- If the
configuration file should be stored on a remote FTP server, select Remote
server @ <IP address>.
- If the
configuration file should be stored on the PC, select Local server.
Specify User Name and Password.
- Click Apply.
Whenever the system configuration is changed, for example by adding or
replacing plug-in units, it could be necessary to upgrade the system software.
The process can be performed locally with the PC connected directly to the NE or
from remote location using a DCN connection.
- Note:
- Software Upgrade cannot be performed when the
NE is in fault mode.
- Note:
- Warnings will be issued when you perform both
upgrade and downgrade.
- Note:
- When you are downgrading beware that you can
loose support on some units.
The following tasks are covered:
This procedure describes how to perform a software upgrade, where all load
modules comply with a baseline defined in a Software Baseline Description File
(SBDF).
- Note:
- The SBDF and the load modules must be stored in
specific folders under: <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_system_release\
ml_tn_software,
see Section
3.2.1.2. See also Section
3.2.4 for instructions on how to install a Software Baseline on the LCT
PC.
- Note:
- MMU2 (and their connected RAUs) and SMU2
ANSI(protection) are upgraded using MSM, Local Upgrade or MINI-LINK
Manager.
- Note:
- Load modules that are not included in the
baseline must be upgraded separately as described in Section
6.13.2. For example, the load modules for RAUs are not included in the
baselines defined by Ericsson.
To perform an upgrade of baseline:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Tools menu, click
Software Upgrade.
- On the Upgrade of Baseline
page, under Desired Baseline, specify the Product Number and
Release state of the new baseline.
- Click Apply and then click
Next.
- On the Settings page, under
FTP server, do one of the following:
- If the new
software configuration resides on a remote FTP server, select Remote
server.
- If the new
software configuration resides on the PC, select Local server. Click
PC to enter the IP address, specify User Name and
Password.
- If the new
software configuration resides on the PC and should be used for upgrade of
remote NEs, select Local server and enter the IP address of the local
NE.
- Under Activation, do one of
the following:
- If you
want the NE to run on the new software configuration immediately after the
software upgrade is finished, select Immediate.
- If you
want the NE to run on the new software configuration from a certain point of
time in the future, select Scheduled and specify Date
(yyyy-mm-dd) and Time (hh:mm).
- Under Confirmation, do one
of the following:
- If you
want to manually confirm the new software configuration, select
Manual. This is not feasible together with a scheduled activation.
- If you
want the NE to automatically confirm the new software configuration, select
Automatic.
- Verify the Preferences used
for the software upgrade. The following is recommended:
- Select
Automatic Upgrade.
- Select
Automatic Downgrade.
- Clear
Accept Failures.
If Automatic Upgrade or Automatic Downgrade are cleared, the
preferences can be changed after the SBDF has been loaded. This will then
initiate an automatic software upgrade/downgrade.
- On the Settings page, click
Next.
- On the Start Upgrade page,
verify the requested actions and click Start Upgrade.
The Upgrade Progress - Baseline page monitors the download of the
new software configuration. The page is refreshed every fifth second. When all
load modules have been correctly received, the status Upgrade
Finished is displayed for the software baseline.
If the upgrade fails, you can either click Cancel to cancel the
upgrade and try again at a later time, or click Start Upgrade to retry
the failed upgrade.
- Depending on the selected
activation method the following apply:
- If
Activation > Immediate was selected:
- Click Activate. The
Activation page is displayed.
- If manual confirmation was
selected, the Confirm New Software Configuration page will be
displayed. Click Confirm. The new software configuration is now the
active software in the NE.
- Note:
- If you do not confirm within 15 minutes the
NE will revert to the old software configuration. Clicking Fallback
will give the same result.
- If
Activation > Scheduled was selected, the Scheduled
Activation page is displayed. The new software configuration will be
automatically confirmed at the specified time.
This procedure describes how to perform a software upgrade of specific load
modules.
- Note:
- The load modules must be stored in specific
folders under: <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_system_release\
ml_tn_software,
see Section
3.2.1.2. See also Section
3.2.5 for instructions on how to install load modules on the LCT
PC.
- Note:
- MMU2 (and their connected RAUs) and SMU2
ANSI(protection) are upgraded using MSM, Local Upgrade or MINI-LINK
Manager.
- Note:
- Performing an upgrade of modules will disable
version control.
To perform an upgrade of modules:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Tools menu, click
Software Upgrade.
- On the Upgrade of Baseline
page, click Upgrade of Modules.
- On the Upgrade of Modules
page, enter the New Release and select the Upgrade check box for
each module to be included in the upgrade.
- Click Apply and then click
Next.
- On the Settings page, under
FTP server, do one of the following:
- If the new
software configuration resides on a remote FTP server, select Remote
server.
- If the new
software configuration resides on the PC, select Local server. Click
PC to enter the IP address, specify User Name and
Password.
- If the new
software configuration resides on the PC and should be used for upgrade of
remote NEs, select Local server and enter the IP address of the local
NE.
- Under Activation, select
Immediate.
- Under Confirmation, do one
of the following:
- If you
want to manually confirm the new software configuration, select
Manual.
- If you
want the NE to automatically confirm the new software configuration, select
Automatic.
- Note:
- Selecting Manual requires an action
whenever the confirmation takes place.
- On the Settings page, click
Next.
- On the Start Upgrade page,
verify the requested actions and click Start Upgrade.
The Upgrade Progress - Modules page monitors the download of the new
software configuration. The page is refreshed every fifth second. When all
load modules have been correctly received, the status Upgrade
Finished is displayed for the all modules and the Activate button
appears.
If the upgrade fails, you can either click Cancel to cancel the
upgrade and try again at a later time, or click Start Upgrade to retry
the failed upgrade.
- Click Activate. The
Activation page is displayed.
- If manual confirmation was
selected, click Confirm on the Upgrade Progress - Modules page.
The new software configuration is now the active software in the NE.
- Note:
- If you do not confirm within 15 minutes the
NE will revert to the old software configuration. Clicking Fallback
will give the same result.
- When the software upgrade is
finished, you can use the View Units page to verify the load module
version in each unit, see Section
11.82.
Should a failure occur, the Event Log page provides information
about the software upgrade, see Section
11.144.
This procedure describes how to revert to a previous software release for an
NPU2 A/NPU1 BA.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Use this function restrictively and only in the unlikely
event that you have performed a software upgrade to a software version,
from which you cannot perform a full software upgrade back to a correct
version.
|
To perform an emergency fallback:
- Connect the USB cable to the USB
connector on the NPU.
- Start a Web browser and enter the
URL http://10.0.0.1/.
- In the Enter
Network Password dialog box, type the user name and password, and
click OK. For more information see Section
9.1.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Installation Wizard.
- On the Tools menu, click
Emergency Fallback.
- On the Emergency Fallback
page, click Perform Emergency Fallback.
- On the Perform Emergency
Fallback page, click OK.
- Click OK, in the
confirmation dialog box.
- On the Emergency Fallback
page, click Finish Installation.
- On the Finish Installation
page, click OK.
- The NE will make a warm restart.
After the restart the NE is in NPU Installation mode where a configuration
file can be downloaded that will cause an upgrade to a consistent
system.
This procedure describes how to revert to a previous software release for an
NPU1 ANSI.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Use this function restrictively and only in the unlikely
event that you have performed a software upgrade to a software version,
from which you cannot perform a full software upgrade back to a correct
version.
|
- Note:
- The NE is accessed in Node Installation mode.
Configure the PC to use a dynamic IP address obtained from the DHCP server in
the NE or alternatively use the static IP address 10.0.0.2. For more information on IP addressing, see Section
3.3.3.
To perform an emergency fallback:
- Switch off and switch on the power
supply.

Figure 27 Entering Node Installation mode
- While the Fault (red), Power
(green) and BR (yellow) LEDs on the NPU1 ANSI are ON (NE power up), press the
BR button gently and release it. The BR (yellow) LED will start flashing,
indicating that the NE is in Node Installation mode.
- Connect the Ethernet cable
(twisted pair) to the 10/100BASE-T port.
- Start a Web browser and enter the
URL http://10.0.0.1/.
- In the Enter
Network Password dialog box, type the user name and password, and
click OK. For more information see Section
9.1.
- On the Tools menu, click
Emergency Fallback.
- On the Emergency Fallback
page, click Perform Emergency Fallback.
- On the Perform Emergency
Fallback page, click OK.
- Click OK, in the
confirmation dialog box.
- On the Emergency Fallback
page, click Finish Installation.
- On the Finish Installation
page, click Apply.
- The Installation Finished
page is displayed and the NE will make a warm restart.
This section gives an introduction to the Command Line Interface (CLI), a
text based configuration tool similar to industry standards used for router
configuration. It is intended for specific configuration and troubleshooting of
IP routing parameters and accessed from a Command Prompt window using
telnet.
The following is covered:
- CLI
Overview, see Section
6.14.1.
- Summary of Important Commands, see Section
6.14.2. This includes standard commands, such as ping and traceroute, used
for general IP DCN troubleshooting.
- OSPF Configuration and Troubleshooting, see Section
6.14.3.
- Configuration of Static Routing, used when the preferred
OSPF routing strategy can not be used, see Section
6.14.4.
This section describes how to use the CLI and the modes of operation.

Figure 28 CLI in a Command Prompt window
Configuration of parameters that could lead to loss of a DCN channel, for
example change of IP address, need to be confirmed. The confirmation is made
automatically if an EEM user is logged on as control_user and an NE generated
ping command to the EEM PC is successful. Otherwise,
confirmation of these parameters must be done manually.
Confirmation from the CLI is done using the write
command, see Table
12. It is also possible to use the Confirm button. The Status Bar
indicates the remaining time and warnings will be issued when time is running
out. It is also possible to use the show confirm
timer command to display the remaining time, see Table
12.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
If you do not confirm your configurations within 15 minutes,
the NE will make a warm restart, restoring the saved configurations, and
your unconfirmed changes will be lost.
|
The CLI contains a text based help facility accessed by typing in the full or
partial command string then typing "?". The CLI displays the command keywords or
parameters plus a short description. Typing only "?" displays all commands that
can be entered.
For example, at the CLI command prompt, type "ping?" (the CLI does not
display the question mark). The CLI displays the following keyword list with
short descriptions for each keyword:
<HOST> Hostname to ping
<A.B:C:D> IP Address to ping
The CLI can complete the spelling of command or parameter keywords, using the
TAB key. The following example shows how this function can be used.
- Type the beginning of a command.
The CLI displays the complete command (if not ambiguous).
TN-10-0-1-1>sh. Press
the TAB key.
TN-10-0-1-1>show
- The CLI shows if the command or
parameter partial spelling is ambiguous and displays the choices that match
the abbreviation.
TN-10-0-1-1>show i.
Press the TAB key.
interface
ip
- Type a character that excludes one
of the choices.
TN-10-0-1-1>show in.
Press the TAB key.
TN-10-0-1-1>show interface
- Type "?" to display the parameters
for the specific command.
[IFNAME] Interface name
TN-10-0-1-1>show interface
The CLI commands are sorted into classes: Exec commands and Configuration
commands. Configuration commands are further categorized into the following
modes: Global Configuration, Interface Configuration and Router Configuration.
Figure
29 illustrates the command modes.

Figure 29 Command modes
Below follows a description of the command modes. The IP address 10.0.1.1 is used as an example.
| Access method |
|
Start a telnet session.
C:\>telnet
10.0.1.1
Password:<view_user password> |
|
| Prompt |
|
TN-10-0-1-1> |
|
| Exit method |
|
exit, quit,
logout terminates the session. |
|
| Description |
|
Change terminal settings and perform
basic tests. Display non-configurable information. |
|
| Access method |
|
Enter enable in Exec mode.
Password:<control_user password> |
|
| Prompt |
|
TN-10-0-1-1# |
|
| Exit method |
|
disable
exits to Exec mode. exit, quit or logout
terminates the session. |
|
| Description |
|
Verify information and save
configurations. |
|
| Access method |
|
Enter configure in Privileged Exec mode. |
|
| Prompt |
|
TN-10-0-1-1(config)# |
|
| Exit method |
|
exit,
end or CTRL+Z
exits to Privileged Exec mode. |
|
| Description |
|
A gateway to other modes.
Configuration of general IP parameters. |
|
| Access method |
|
Enter one of the following commands
in Global Configuration mode:
interface ethernet
interface ospf <if>
interface serial<if> |
|
| Prompts |
|
TN-10-0-1-1-(interface-ethernet)#
TN-10-0-1-1-ospf(config-if)#
TN-10-0-1-1-(interface-serial)# |
|
| Exit method |
|
exit or
quit exits to Global Configuration mode.
end or CTRL+Z
exits to Privileged Exec mode. |
|
| Description |
|
Configuration of Ethernet, PPP
interfaces and OSPF parameters related to specific interfaces. |
|
| Access method |
|
Enter router
ospf in Global Configuration mode. |
|
| Prompt |
|
TN-10-0-1-1-ospf(config-router)# |
|
| Exit method |
|
exit or
quit exits to Global Configuration mode.
end or CTRL+Z
exits to Privileged Exec mode. |
|
| Description |
|
Configuration of the OSPF routing
protocol. |
|
Table
10 describes the editing features of the CLI.
- Note:
- The telnet client
must be configured for VT100 emulation for the arrow keys to
work.
Table 10
Command editing keys and functions
|
Keys |
Description |
|
TAB |
Completes a partial command name entry. When you enter a unique set of
characters and press the TAB key, the system completes the command name.
If you enter a set of characters that could indicate more than one
command, the system beeps to indicate an error and provides a list of
commands that begin with that string. |
|
? |
Entering a stand-alone question mark (?) provides a list of all
available commands. Entering a question mark (?) immediately after a
partial command (no space), provides a list of commands that begin with
that string. |
|
BACKSPACE |
Erases the character to the left of the cursor. |
|
ENTER |
Performs the function of processing a command. At the ">" prompt on
a terminal screen, pressing the ENTER key scrolls down one line. |
|
LEFT ARROW |
Moves the cursor one character to the left. When you enter a command
that extends beyond a single line, you can press the LEFT ARROW key
repeatedly to scroll back toward the system prompt and verify the
beginning of the command entry. |
|
RIGHT ARROW |
Moves the cursor one character to the right. |
|
UP ARROW or CTRL+P |
Recalls commands in the history buffer, beginning with the most recent
command. Repeat the key sequence to recall successively older
commands. |
|
DOWN ARROW or CTRL+N |
Returns to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling
commands with UP ARROW or CTRL+P. Repeat the key sequence to recall
successively more recent commands. |
|
CTRL+A |
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line. |
|
CTRL+B |
Moves the cursor back one character. |
|
CTRL+C |
Starts on a new command line. |
|
CTRL+D |
Deletes the character at the cursor. |
|
CTRL+E |
Moves the cursor to the end of the command line. |
|
CTRL+F |
Moves the cursor forward one character. |
|
CTRL+H |
Deletes the character in front of the cursor. |
|
CTRL+K |
Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the command
line. |
|
CTRL+L |
Redisplays the system prompt and command line. |
|
CTRL+U |
Deletes all characters from the command line. |
|
CTRL+W |
Deletes the word to the left of the cursor. |
|
CTRL+Z |
Exits to Privileged Exec mode. |
This section gives a summary of the most
important commands in the different modes. Use the help utility to get all
available options for each command.
Table 11
Commands in Exec mode
|
Command |
Parameter |
Description |
|
debug |
ospf |
Enables debugging of OSPF information. The following additional
parameters are supported:
route - OSPF route information
packet - OSPF route information
nfsm - Neighbor state machine
lsa - Link state advertisement
ifsm - Interface state machine
event - OSPF event information |
|
enable |
- |
Enters Privileged Exec mode, see Table
12. Protected by a control_user password. |
|
exit |
- |
Terminates the current telnet session. |
|
logout |
- |
Terminates the current telnet session. |
|
ping |
- |
Used for testing a bi-directional IP connection. |
|
quit |
- |
Terminates the current telnet session. |
|
show |
- |
Displays information as described below. |
|
interface |
Displays the configuration and status of the interfaces (PPP and
Ethernet) |
|
networks |
Lists all DCN networks with interface type, NE identification,
interface name, bandwidth and status. |
|
history |
Displays CLI command history per command mode. The list is cleared
after each telnet session. Use the UP ARROW/DOWN ARROW keys in order to
access the command history buffer. Note: the telnet client must be
configured for VT100 emulation for the arrow keys to work. |
|
ip |
The following additional parameters are supported:
route - IP routing table
protocols - Protocol process parameters and
statistics
ospf - OSPF information.
forwarding - IP forwarding status
traffic - IP statistics |
|
confirm timer |
Displays the remaining time until a configuration confirm must be
done. |
|
telnet |
- |
To establish a telnet session onto a host. |
|
traceroute |
- |
Used to test IP connections with other NEs, listing routers visited on
the way. |
Table 12
Commands in Privileged Exec mode
|
Command |
Parameter |
Description |
|
configure |
- |
Enters global configuration mode, see Table
13. |
|
debug |
ospf |
Enables debugging of OSPF information. The following additional
parameters are supported:
route - OSPF route information
packet - OSPF route information
nfsm - Neighbor state machine
lsa - Link state advertisement
ifsm - Interface state machine
event - OSPF event information |
|
disable |
- |
Returns to Exec mode, see Table
11. |
|
enable |
- |
No effect since already in Privileged Exec mode. |
|
exit |
- |
Terminates the current telnet session. |
|
logout |
- |
Terminates the current telnet session. |
|
no |
- |
Negates a configuration |
|
ping |
- |
Used for testing a bi-directional IP connection. |
|
quit |
- |
Terminates the current telnet session. |
|
show |
- |
Displays information as described below. |
|
interface |
Displays the configuration and status of the interfaces (PPP and
Ethernet). |
|
networks |
Lists all DCN networks with interface type, NE identification,
interface name, bandwidth and status. |
|
history |
Displays CLI command history per command mode. The list is cleared
after each telnet session. Use the UP ARROW/DOWN ARROW keys in order to
access the command history buffer. Note: the telnet client must be
configured for VT100 emulation for the arrow keys to work. |
|
show |
ip |
The following additional parameters are supported:
route - IP routing table
protocols - Protocol process parameters and
statistics
ospf - OSPF information.
forwarding - IP forwarding status
traffic - IP statistics |
|
confirm timer |
Displays the remaining time until a configuration confirm must be
done. |
|
telnet |
- |
To establish a telnet session onto another NE or get access to a local
host shell. |
|
terminal |
ospf |
Enables OSPF debug printouts to the telnet console. |
|
no |
Negates a command or set its default. |
|
traceroute |
- |
Used to test IP connections with other NEs, listing routers visited on
the way. |
|
write |
- |
Sends operator confirm for configuration of parameters that could cause
loss of a DCN channel.
Caution! If you do not save your
configurations within 15 minutes, the NE will make a warm restart,
restoring the saved configurations, and your unconfirmed changes will be
lost. For more information, see Section
6.14.1.1. |
Table 13
Commands in Global Configuration mode
|
Command |
Parameter |
Description |
|
debug |
ospf |
Enables debugging of OSPF information. The following additional
parameters are supported:
route - OSPF route information
packet - OSPF route information
nfsm - Neighbor state machine
lsa - Link state advertisement
ifsm - Interface state machine
event - OSPF event information |
|
end |
- |
Exits to Privileged Exec mode. |
|
exit |
- |
Exits to Privileged Exec mode. |
|
ip |
- |
IP configuration as described below. |
|
route |
Sets up static IP routes, including the default gateway
route. |
|
forwarding |
Turns on IP forwarding (default). |
|
name-server |
Configures one, two or three Domain Name Servers (DNS).
This is normally done from the EEM. |
|
domainname |
Configures the name of the domain the NE belongs to. This is used for
name resolution.
This is normally done from the EEM. |
|
dhcp relayaddress |
Configures the IP address of the DHCP server the NE is a relay for.
This is normally done from the EEM. |
|
no |
- |
Negates a configuration as described below. |
|
router |
Disables a routing protocol. |
|
interface |
Selects an interface to delete. |
|
ip |
Removes IP configuration. |
|
ntp |
server |
Defines the address of the NTP server.
This is normally done from the EEM. |
|
router |
ospf |
Used to configure OSPF, see Table
15.
For a summary of the most common OSPF related commands, see Section
6.14.3.2. |
Table 14
Commands in Interface Configuration mode
|
Command in Global Configuration mode |
Command |
Description |
|
interface ethernet |
ip address |
Configures the IP address of the ethernet interface.
This is normally done from the EEM. |
|
interface ospf <if> |
- |
Configures OSPF parameters for the selected interface as described
below.
For a summary of the most common commands, see Section
6.14.3.2 . |
|
description |
Interface specific description. |
|
end |
Exits to Privileged Exec mode, see Table
12. |
|
exit |
Exits to Global Configuration mode, see Table
13. |
|
ip |
Configuration of IP parameters. |
|
list |
Prints the command list. |
|
no |
Negates a command or sets its default value. |
|
ospf |
OSPF interface commands. |
|
quit |
Exits to Global Configuration mode, see Table
13. |
|
write |
Displays the OSPF running-config file. |
|
interface serial <if> |
- |
Specifies a particular serial interface as described below. |
|
trapenable |
Enables traps for the interface. |
|
shutdown |
Sets the administrative status to Down. |
|
exit |
Exits to Global Configuration mode, see Table 13. |
Table 15
Commands in Router Configuration mode
|
Command |
Description |
|
area |
Sets OSPF area parameters. |
|
auto-cost |
Calculates OSPF interface cost according to bandwidth. |
|
compatible |
OSPF compatibility list. |
|
default-information |
Controls distribution of default information. |
|
default-metric |
Sets metric of redistributed routes. |
|
distance |
Defines an administrative distance. |
|
distribute-list |
Filters networks in routing updates. |
|
end |
Exits to Privileged Exec mode, see Table
12. |
|
exit |
Exits to Global Configuration mode, see Table
13. |
|
help |
Description of the interactive help system. |
|
list |
Prints the command list. |
|
neighbor |
Specifies neighbor router. |
|
network |
Enables routing on an IP network. |
|
no |
Negate a command or set its defaults |
|
opaque-lsa-capable |
Enables Opaque-LSA capability |
|
ospf |
OSPF specific commands. |
|
overflow |
Controls overflow. |
|
passive-interface |
Suppresses routing updates on an interface. |
|
quit |
Exits to Global Configuration mode, see Table
13. |
|
redistribute |
Redistributes information from another routing protocol. |
|
refresh |
Adjusts refresh parameters. |
|
router-id |
Sets the router ID for the OSPF process. |
|
summary-address |
Creates aggregate addresses. |
|
timers |
Adjusts routing timers. |
|
write |
Displays the OSPF running-config file. |
This section introduces how to use the CLI for OSPF configuration and
troubleshooting.
If there is only one Area Border Router (ABR) within an area, it is
recommended to define the area as a stub area, in all routers within the area,
in order to reduce the size of the routing table. Using stub areas improves the
performance of the OSPF routing by reducing the size of the link state database
and the memory requirements of routers inside the areas.
Creating a stub area can also be done from the EEM, see Section
6.11.5.
The following example shows how to define an area (area ID=1.1.1.1) as a stub
area.
- Log in in Exec mode.
C:\>telnet
10.0.1.1
Password:*****
- Enter Privileged Exec mode.
TN-10-0-1-1>enable
Password:******
- Enter Global Configuration mode.
TN-10-0-1-1#configure
- Enter Router Configuration mode
for OSPF.
TN-10-0-1-1(config)#router
ospf
- Define the area as a stub area.
TN-10-0-1-1-ospf(config-router)#area 1.1.1.1 stub
- Note:
- For an ABR it is possible to add the no-summary parameter in order to stop the ABR from
sending summary link advertisements into the stub area. This will reduce the
routing table even more.
- Exit Router Configuration mode.
TN-10-0-1-1-ospf(config-router)#exit
- Exit Global Configuration mode.
TN-10-0-1-1(config)#exit
- Save the configuration.
TN-10-0-1-1#write
This section introduces the most common commands for OSPF configuration. Use
the help utility to get all available parameter options for each command.
Table 16 OSPF
configuration commands
|
Command |
Mode |
Description |
|
interface ospf <if>
Example:
interface ospf ppp0 |
Global Configuration |
Enters Interface Configuration mode. |
|
router ospf |
Global Configuration |
Enters Router Configuration mode for OSPF. |
|
area stub
Example:
area 1.1.1.1 stub |
Router Configuration |
Defines an area as a stub area. All routers (including the ) in a stub
area must be configured accordingly. See also Section
6.14.3.1. |
|
network
Example:
network 10.0.0.0/8 area 1.1.1.1 |
Router Configuration |
Enables OSPF routing with a specified area ID on interfaces with IP
addresses that match the specified network address. |
|
redistribute
Example:
redistribute connected |
Router Configuration |
To redistribute routes from other routing protocols, static routes and
kernel routes into an OSPF routing table |
|
router-id
Example:
router-id 2.3.4.5 |
Router Configuration |
To specify a router ID for the OSPF process. |
|
cost
Example:
ip ospf cost 10 |
Interface Configuration |
Sets the interface cost. |
|
dead-interval
Example:
ip ospf dead-interval 60 |
Interface Configuration |
Sets the dead-interval (default 40). |
|
hello-interval
Example:
ip ospf hello-interval 20 |
Interface Configuration |
Sets the hello-interval (default 10). |
|
priority
Example:
ip ospf priority 3 |
Interface Configuration |
Sets the router priority to determine the Designated Router (DR) for
the network (default 1) |
Table
17 lists the most common commands showing OSPF configuration. Use the help
utility to get all available parameter options for each command.
All commands are entered in Privileged Exec
mode.
Table 17 OSPF
show commands
|
Command |
Description |
|
show ip ospf database |
Displays a database summary for OSPF information. |
|
show ip ospf database network |
Displays information about the network LSAs. |
|
show ip ospf database router |
Displays information about the router LSAs. |
|
show ip ospf database summary |
Displays information about the summary LSAs. |
|
show ip ospf interface |
Displays interface information for OSPF. |
|
show ip ospf neighbor |
Displays information on OSPF neighbors. |
|
show ip ospf route |
Displays the OSPF routing table. |
|
show ip route |
Displays the complete routing table including OSPF (O)
entries. |
Using static routing means that a fixed routing scheme is entered manually
from the CLI. Static routing can also be done from the EEM, see Section
6.11.3. A maximum of 100 static routes is possible.
The following command is used from the CLI:
ip route <destination> <gateway>
The example below sets up a static route from an NE (IP address= 10.0.1.1) to IP address 10.0.3.0,
subnet mask 24, through the gateway 10.0.2.1.
- Log in in Exec mode.
C:\>telnet
10.0.1.1
Password:******
- Enter Privileged Exec mode.
TN-10-0-1-1>enable
Password:******
- Enter Global Configuration mode.
TN-10-0-1-1#configure
- Set up the static route.
TN-10-0-1-1(config)#ip route
10.0.3.0/24 10.0.2.1
- Exit Global Configuration mode.
TN-10-0-1-1(config)#exit
- Save the configuration.
TN-10-0-1-1#write
Although a default route is not required in OSPF networks it is recommended
to configure a default gateway since it reduces the risk of loosing DCN contact
with the NE. The example below defines a default gateway with IP address 10.0.2.1.
- Log in in Exec mode.
C:\>telnet
10.0.1.1
Password:******
- Enter Privileged Exec mode.
TN-10-0-1-1>enable
Password:******
- Enter Global Configuration mode.
TN-10-0-1-1#configure
- Define the default gateway.
TN-10-0-1-1(config)#ip route
0.0.0.0/0 10.0.2.1
- Exit Global Configuration mode.
TN-10-0-1-1(config)#exit
- Save the configuration.
TN-10-0-1-1#write
Reports on the NEs hardware and software inventory, and the configuration
settings can be generated, viewed, and saved.
To generate a report:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE (the root).
- On the Tools menu, click
Report to open the Report page.
- Select the items to include on the
report. You can click Clear All and Select All to toggle all
check boxes on and off.
- Click View Report to see
the report in the LCT, or click Save Report to save the report as an
HTML file on your computer. See Section
11.77 for information on what the report contains.
This section contains information and instructions for typical fault, status
and test handling tasks.
The following areas are covered:
This section describes the principles of the operational status of equipment
and interfaces when working with the EEM.
The operational status is a high-level status indication of a plug-unit or
the NE. It is displayed as Status on an Alarms and Status page,
see for example Section
11.124. An equipment failure initiates an update of the operational status.
A more detailed equipment status is indicated by alarms, for example high
temperature, see Section
7.2.5.
The signification of the operational status of a unit is listed in Table
18.
Table 18
Operational status of equipment
|
Operational status |
NE |
Unit |
|
In Service |
The NE is operating properly. |
The unit is operating properly. |
|
Reduced Service |
The traffic functionality in the backplane is available but the
management functionality or a redundant function is reduced or
unavailable. A further reduction will have impact on traffic. |
The traffic functionality is available but the management functionality
is reduced or unavailable. |
|
Out of Service |
The NE is not operating. |
The unit is not operating, that is a traffic disturbing failure has
occurred. A plug-in unit is in a cold reset state where all traffic,
control and management logics are reset. |
The relation between the operational status and alarm severity is listed in
Table 19.
Table 19
Relation between operational status and alarm severity
|
Operational status |
Alarm severity |
|
In Service |
Clear/Warning |
|
Reduced Service |
Minor/Major |
|
Out of Service |
Critical |
The possible operational status of an interface is listed in Table 20.
Table 20
Operational status of an interface
|
Operational status |
Description |
|
Up |
Payload is passing on the interface and one or several of the active
lower layers have operational status Up. |
|
Down |
A defect is detected on the interface or administrative status is set
to Down. |
|
Unknown |
The unit is in cold reset, warm reset or repair state. |
|
Testing |
The interface is in test mode, for example a loop is active or a BERT
is running. |
|
Lower Layer Down |
The interface is Down due to lower layer interfaces. Payload is passing
on the interface but not all active lower layers have operational status
Up. |
The sending of alarm notifications can be disabled on the following
levels:
- NE, preventing alarms from
leaving the NE. This will send an event notification to the EEM (or MINI-LINK
Manager) informing that no notifications will be sent. If the alarm
notifications are enabled later on a new notification will be sent informing
about the change. New alarms on NE level will always be added to the Alarm
List.
- Plug-in
unit, also suppressing notifications from all the interfaces on the unit.
Disabling alarm notifications on a plug-in unit means that for all its
existing alarms a clear alarm is sent removing the alarms from the Alarm
List.
- Interface,
also suppressing notifications from higher layer interfaces. Disabling alarm
notifications on an interface means that for all its existing alarms a clear
alarm is sent removing the alarms from the Alarm List.
Enabling of alarm notifications on any level means that new alarms are added
to the Alarm List.
Alarm notifications on all levels are enabled by default. However, to prevent
too many alarms from not traffic routed DS1s, notifications are default disabled
on these interfaces.
The alarms and status information of the NE, a plug-in unit or an interface
is displayed on a specific Alarms and Status page, see for example Section
11.100.
To access an Alarms and Status page:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the entity for which you want to view the alarms and status.
- On the Fault menu, click
Alarms and Status.
The alarms and status for DCN and Ethernet Bridge are accessed on the
Fault menu by selecting the NE in the Navigation Tree.
The alarms and status of Radio Terminals with MMU2 BA/CA are displayed on the
Radio Terminal Alarms and Status page, see Section
11.126.
An Alarm List page displaying all active alarms is available on NE,
unit and interface level, see Section
11.143. The Alarm List is cleared after a restart (cold or warm) of
the NPU or NE.
To display the Alarm List:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the entity for which you want to display the Alarm List.
- On the Fault menu, click
Alarm List.
The NE keeps a log of the 400 latest alarms and events, which can be accessed
from the Event Log page, see Section
11.144. The Event Log is cleared after a restart of the NPU or
NE.
To display the Event Log:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Fault menu, click
Event Log.
Table 21 explains the signification of the alarm
and event severities.
Table 21
Explanations of alarm and event severities
|
Color |
Severity |
Description |
|
Green

|
Cleared |
Indicates the clearing of one or more previously reported
alarms. |
|
Bluish-green

|
Indeterminate |
Indicates that the severity level cannot be determined. This severity
is not used on NE level. |
|
Blue

|
Warning |
Indicates the detection of a potential or impending service affecting
fault, before any significant effects are known. An action should be taken
to further diagnose (if necessary) and correct the problem in order to
prevent it from becoming more serious service affecting. Can also be used
for events. |
|
Yellow

|
Minor |
Indicates the existence of a non-service affecting fault condition and
that a corrective action should be taken in order to prevent a more
serious (for example, service affecting) fault. Such a severity can be
reported, for example when the detected alarm condition is not currently
degrading the capacity of the managed object. This severity is used for
example in case of high temperature on a unit. |
|
Orange

|
Major |
Indicates that a service affecting condition has developed and an
urgent corrective action is required. Such a severity can be reported, for
example when there is a severe degradation in the capability of a unit or
interface and its full capability must be restored, like in case of SES or
high temperature on a unit. |
|
Red

|
Critical
|
Indicates that a service affecting condition has occurred and an
immediate corrective action is required. Such a severity can be reported,
for example when a unit or interface is totally Out of Service and its
capability must be restored, like in case of a
LOS. |
This section gives a summary of:
Table 22 List
of alarms
|
Entity |
Specific Problem |
Description |
Severity |
|
NE |
Power Failure |
A malfunction in the redundant PFU. |
Major |
|
Low Input Voltage |
The input voltage is low. If it drops further, one or more plug-in
units may stop working. |
Major |
|
Node Installation |
The NE is in Node Installation mode. Enter the URL http://10.0.0.1/ to reach the
installation wizard. |
Minor |
|
NPU Installation |
The NE is in NPU Installation mode. Enter the URL http://10.0.0.1/
to reach the installation wizard. |
Major |
|
Traffic System Failure |
A malfunction related to traffic. At least one bus in the backplane
fails. |
Major: One bus fails.
Critical: Two or three TDM busses fail. |
|
Control System Failure |
A malfunction related to management. The NPU or the control bus fails.
Load the Error Log. A software upgrade is probably required. |
Major |
|
Node Fault Mode |
The self-repair mechanism has failed and the NE is in a fault
mode(1).
A replacement of the NPU is probably required. |
Critical |
|
OSPF LSA Database Overload |
The OSPF routing database is full due to too many routers in the
network. |
Minor |
|
FAL <number> license missing |
A license for an optional feature with the specified product number is
missing. |
Major: An optional feature is used without a license
Critical: An optional feature is locked due to a missing
license |
|
Not able to find RMM |
The RMM is missing or it has failed. |
Major: The first 30 days
Critical: After 30 days |
|
Plug-in Unit |
Unit Removed |
The unit is removed. |
Critical |
| |
|
High Temperature |
The unit has reached an abnormal temperature. |
Minor |
|
Excessive Temperature |
The unit has reached an excessive temperature. |
Critical |
|
Wrong Software |
A wrong load module release is running on the unit. |
Critical |
|
Plug-in Unit |
Hardware Error |
A malfunction related to hardware. |
Minor: Control system failure.
Critical: Traffic or power system failure. |
|
Wrong NPU software |
The unit needs a later NPU software release |
Critical |
|
Unsupported Unit Type |
Unit type not supported by SW. |
Critical |
|
Wrong Position |
The unit is in the wrong position in the AMM. |
Critical |
|
Insufficient Resources |
The NE does not have the resources to handle this plug-in unit. |
Critical |
|
Missing License |
When this plug-in unit was inserted, the total number of plug-in units
in the AMM became more than 10, but no license for the optional feature
AMM 20p Slot Extension was available. Only
applicable for AMM 20p. |
Critical |
|
Reserved Position |
The plug-in unit in this position is of a different type than what the
position is reserved for. |
Critical |
|
FAU |
Hardware Error |
A malfunction related to hardware. |
Critical |
|
MMU2 BA/CA(2) |
RCC Unavailable |
Communication is lost on the Radio Communication Channel, between the
MMU and the RAU. |
Major |
|
ICC Unavailable |
Communication is lost on the Internal Communication Channel, between
two MMUs |
Major |
|
HCC Unavailable |
Communication is lost on the Hop Communication Channel, between the
near-end MMU and the far-end MMU. |
Major |
|
ATPC Capability (Far-end) |
The terminal on the far end is configured for ATPC but at least one of
the indoor units does not support ATPC. |
Major |
|
RAU IF (on MMU2 BA/CA) |
Dmod Clock |
The internal data rate of the MMU does not correspond to the received
data rate. This fault will cause bit slip in the composite bit
stream. |
Critical: Active transmitter.
Major: Standby transmitter. |
|
LOS |
Input traffic failure in the transmitting direction. |
Critical: Active transmitter.
Major: Standby transmitter. |
|
Rx IF Input |
Failure on the receiver IF signal from the RAU to the MMU. |
Major |
|
Tx IF Input |
Failure on the received IF signal from the MMU to the RAU. |
Critical: Active transmitter.
Major: Standby transmitter. |
|
Radio Frame |
The receiver failed to synchronize the frame of the received composite
bit stream due to signal failure. |
Critical: Active transmitter.
Major: Standby transmitter. |
|
RAU IF (on MMU2 BA/CA) |
BER |
The Bit Error Rate for the received signal has exceeded the BER alarm
threshold. |
Critical: Active transmitter.
Major: Standby transmitter. |
|
Radio ID |
The received traffic comes from a terminal with an ID not matching the
far-end ID. |
Critical: Active transmitter.
Major: Standby transmitter. |
|
Mod Index |
The modulation index of the MMU, controlled by the far end MMU, is out
of the allowed range. Only valid for C-QPSK modulation. |
Major |
|
AIS Received |
AIS detected on the received traffic signal. Only available for a
far-end terminal with MMU2 or a far-end MINI-LINK E terminal. |
Critical: Active transmitter.
Major: Standby transmitter. |
|
Unknown |
The status of the interface is unknown, for example due to loss of
communication. |
Major |
|
Rx Loop(3) |
Indicates that an Rx Loop is set. |
Warning |
|
IF Loop (3) |
Indicates that an IF Loop is set. |
Warning |
|
SWITCH (MMU2 BA/CA) |
Unable To Protect |
The protection failed. |
Major: A Tx or a common Tx/Rx alarm on one path. Also for an Rx alarm
on one path and the duration is longer than 200 s.
Critical:f alarms on both paths. |
|
Hitless Phase |
Failure of synchronizing the received traffic in the two MMUs with a
duration longer than 200 s. |
Major |
|
Tx Switch Over |
A TDM Tx switch or an active RAU transmitter switch. Only 1+1 Hot
Standby. |
Major |
|
Remote Tx Switch Over |
An active RAU transmitter switch ordered from the far-end. Only 1+1 Hot
Standby. |
Major |
|
RF Input Threshold Protection |
The RF input level of both receivers in a protected terminal has
dropped below their respective RF Input Alarm Threshold. |
Warning |
|
RAU (connected to MMU2 BA/CA) |
ATPC Capability |
The terminal is configured for ATPC, but the RAU does not support ATPC.
This alarm is activated only if ATPC is turned on (any direction). |
Major |
|
Unit Removed |
The RAU is disconnected from the MMU. |
Critical |
|
Hardware Error |
A malfunction related to hardware. |
Minor: Control system failure.
Critical: Traffic or power system failure. |
|
Incompatible Units |
The wrong type of RAU is used. |
Critical |
|
Unknown |
The status of the unit is unknown, for example due to loss of
communication. |
Major |
|
RF (on RAU connected to MMU2
BA/CA) |
Tx Frequency |
The transmitter frequency synthesizer loop is unlocked. |
Minor: Control system failure.
Critical: Traffic or power system failure. |
|
Rx Frequency |
The receiver frequency synthesizer loop is unlocked. |
Minor: Control system failure.
Critical: Traffic or power system failure. |
|
RF Output Level |
A major degradation of the transmitter output power is detected. |
Major |
|
Rx AFC |
The frequency of the received signal is outside the range of the
Automatic Frequency Control in the RAU receiver. |
Major |
|
RF Input Level |
The received RF input signal level has dropped below the threshold for
the receiver. |
Minor: Control system failure.
Critical: Traffic or power system failure. |
|
RF Input Threshold |
The RF input level has dropped below the specified threshold value in
dBm for the input power. |
Warning |
|
RF Loop (3) |
Indicates that an RF Loop is set. |
Warning |
|
Tx Off (3) |
Indicates that the transmitter is off. |
Warning |
|
DS1 |
LOS |
Loss Of Signal is detected on the incoming traffic. |
Critical |
|
LOF |
Loss of Frame |
Critical |
|
LOMF |
Loss of MultiFrame |
Critical |
|
RAI |
Remote Alarm Indication |
Minor |
|
AIS |
An Alarm Indication Signal is detected on the incoming traffic. |
Minor |
|
Unavailable State |
Unavailable State is activated after 10 consecutive SES. 10 consecutive
non-SES will cease the alarm. |
Critical |
|
LOCD |
Loss of cell delineation |
Ciritical |
|
1+1 DS1 SNCP |
Unable To Protect |
The protection has failed. |
Minor: The redundant interface fails.
Critical: Both interfaces fail or the traffic is locked to a failing
interface. |
|
MUX12/MUX23 |
LOS |
Loss Of Signal is detected on the incoming traffic. |
Critical |
|
AIS |
An Alarm Indication Signal is detected on the incoming traffic. |
Minor: MMU2 B/C
Critical: MMU2/SMU2 |
|
Equipment OoS |
Equipment Out of Service. |
Critical |
|
LOF(4) |
Loss Of Frame alignment. |
Critical |
|
RAI (4) |
Remote Alarm Indication |
Critical |
|
OC-3/STS-3 port |
Clock Loss of Reference |
Loss of clock reference. |
Minor |
|
Line/Section |
LOS |
Loss Of Signal. |
Critical |
|
LOF |
Loss Of Frame Alignment. |
Critical |
|
TIM |
Trace Identifier Mismatch |
Critical |
|
AIS |
Alarm Indication Signal |
Minor |
|
RDI |
Remote Defect Indication |
Minor |
|
DEG |
Degraded Signal |
Critical |
|
Unavailable State |
Unavailable State is activated after 10 consecutive SES. 10 consecutive
non-SES will cease the alarm. |
Critical |
|
APS |
Unable To Protect |
The protection has failed. |
Minor: The redundant interface fails.
Critical: Both interfaces fail or the traffic is locked to a failing
interface. |
|
Mode Mismatch |
MSP mode mismatch. Far End configured as MSP 1:n |
Minor |
|
Unavailable State |
Unavailable State is activated after 10 consecutive SES. 10 consecutive
non-SES will cease the alarm. |
Critical |
|
STS-1 |
LOP |
Loss Of Pointer |
Critical |
|
AIS |
Alarm Indication Signal |
Minor |
|
RDI |
Remote Defect Indication |
Minor |
|
Unequipped |
The interface has no content since the unit is not configured |
Critical |
|
PLM |
Payload Mismatch |
Critical |
|
TIM |
Trace Identifier Mismatch |
Critical |
|
DEG |
Degraded Signal |
Major |
|
LOM/TULOM |
Loss Of Multiframe/Tributary Unit Loss Of Multiframe |
Critical |
|
Unavailable State |
Unavailable State is activated after 10 consecutive SES. 10 consecutive
non-SES will cease the alarm. |
Critical |
|
VT1.5 |
LOP |
Loss Of Pointer |
Critical |
|
AIS |
Alarm Indication Signal |
Minor |
|
RDI |
Remote Defect Indication |
Minor |
|
Unequipped |
The interface has no content since the unit is not configured |
Critical |
|
PLM |
Payload Mismatch |
Critical |
|
TIM |
Trace Identifier Mismatch |
Critical |
|
DEG |
Degraded Signal |
Major |
|
Unavailable State |
Unavailable State is activated after 10 consecutive SES. 10 consecutive
non-SES will cease the alarm. |
Critical |
|
User Input |
User Defined |
The Specific Problem and Severity is defined on the User Input
Configuration page. |
User Defined |
|
PPP |
PPP Down |
Failure in the DCN communication. |
Minor |
|
OSPF |
OSPF LSA database overload |
The OSPF routing database is full. |
Major |
|
HDLC |
Down/No Traffic |
No throughput on the interface. All IM interfaces are Down. |
Critical |
|
Degraded Service |
One or several (but not all) IM interfaces are Down, leading to
decreased speed on the bridge connection. |
Major |
|
LAN |
Ethernet down |
The interface is down. |
Minor: Site LAN
Critical: Ethernet Bridge |
|
Bridge |
Ethernet down |
The interface is down. |
Critical |
|
IM Group |
Lower Layer Down
No Traffic |
No throughput on the interface. All IM interfaces are down. |
Critical |
|
Degraded Service |
One or several (but not all) IM interfaces are down, leading to
decreased speed on the bridge connection. |
Major |
|
Degraded Service: Quality of Service |
The defined threshold for discarded frames on the IM group layer is
exceeded. |
Major |
|
Loss of keep alive
Keep Alive |
Loss of keep-alive frames is detected. |
Critical |
(1)
Software Upgrade cannot be performed when the NE is in fault
mode.
(2)
Radio Terminal specific alarms. See also general alarms under Plug-in Unit.
(3) No notification is sent.
(4) MMU2 BA/CA only.
- Note:
- In addition to the alarms listed above, the
Alarm List will also display a few alarms related to Radio Terminal
units and interfaces. These alarms are, for terminals with MMU2, presented,
described and handled in MSM.
Table 23 List
of events
|
Entity |
Specific Problem |
Description |
Severity |
|
NE |
Cold Restart |
A restart of the control and management system as well as the traffic
system. This type of restart will disturb all traffic. |
Warning |
|
Warm Restart |
A restart of the control and management system. Traffic is not
disturbed by this type of restart. |
Warning |
|
Notification Enable |
Sent to all subscribers indicating that notifications are
enabled. |
Warning |
|
Notification Disable |
Sent to all subscribers indicating that notifications are
disabled. |
Warning |
|
FTP Connection Error |
An error in the communication with the FTP server has occurred. |
Minor |
|
Load Module Error |
Load module is corrupt or program error during software upgrade. |
Minor |
|
Software Upgrade Started |
A software upgrade procedure is started. |
Warning |
|
Software Upgrade Finished |
A software upgrade procedure is finished. |
Warning |
|
Software Running |
The new software is accepted and running. |
Warning |
|
Management Software Fallback |
NPU emergency fallback to the previous NPU software release. |
Warning |
|
Software Upgrade Failed |
Software upgrade failed. |
Warning |
|
Software Upgrade Canceled |
The software upgrade is canceled. |
Warning |
|
Plug-in Unit |
Unit Inserted |
A unit is inserted. |
Warning |
|
Unit Removed |
A unit is removed. |
Warning |
|
Software not Conform to Baseline |
Version control is enabled but upgrade/downgrade preferences do not
allow DP software to be upgraded/downgraded to the revision corresponding
to the SBL. |
Warning |
|
Load Module not Part of Baseline |
The load module that is required for the unit is not part of the
SBL. |
Warning |
|
Minimum Software Revision |
An attempt to downgrade the unit to under its minimum software revision
was made. |
Warning |
|
Load Module Programming Failure |
Software upgrade of this unit failed due to a programming failure
(FLASH memory). |
Warning |
|
Reservation Cleared |
A reservation for a specific unit type in a specific position in the
AMM was cleared. |
Warning |
|
1+1 DS1 SNCP |
Protection Switch |
A protection switch has occurred. |
Warning |
|
APS |
Protection Switch Reject |
A requested protection switch has been rejected. |
Warning |
|
Protection Switch Event |
A protection switch has occurred. |
Warning |
|
SWITCH
(MMU2 BA/CA) |
Protection Switch |
A protection switch has occurred. |
Warning |
|
MMU2 BA/CA and corresponding RAU |
Spontaneous Restart |
The processor in the RAU has restarted. |
Warning |
|
Hot Swap Incomplete |
A hot swap was made, but the configuration of the new unit is
incomplete. This happens when the new unit does not support all
configuration options of the old unit. |
Warning |
There are several pages displaying the status of the DCN, in terms of
parameters for interfaces and IP routing.
To view the DCN status:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Fault menu, click
DCN.
- The DCN parameters are grouped in
different categories. Click a link to display a specific category.
Loops can be used to verify that the transmission system is working properly
or they can be used to locate the faulty unit or interface in case of
failure.
The following loops are supported:
| Connection Loop |
|
Loops an DS1 interface connected to
the backplane back to its origin. The loop is done in the backplane. If
the interface is traffic routed an AIS is transmitted to the other
interface in the traffic routing. |
|
| Line Loop |
|
Loops an incoming line signal
(Line/Section, MUX23, MUX12 and DS1) back to its origin. The loop is done
in the plug-in unit, close to the line interface. An AIS is sent to the
backplane. |
|
| Local Loop |
|
Loops a line signal (Line/Section,
MUX23, MUX12 and DS1) received from the backplane back to its origin. The
loop is done in the plug-in unit. An AIS is transmitted to the line
interface. |
|

Figure 30 Loops
The following loops are supported for the Radio Terminal:
- Note:
- Loops for Radio Terminals with MMU2 are mainly
set using MSM.
| IF Loop |
|
In the MMU the traffic signal to be
transmitted is, after being modulated, mixed with the frequency of a local
oscillator and looped back for demodulation (on the receiving side). |
|
| RF Loop |
|
In the RAU a fraction of the RF
signal transmitted is shifted in frequency and looped back to the
receiving side. |
|
| Rx Loop |
|
This loop is similar to the
Connection Loop but the loop is done in the plug-in unit close to the TDM
bus, where a group ofDS1s in the traffic connection is looped back to its
origin. The Rx Loop can be used to verify the communication over the radio
path.
- Note:
- If the far-end terminal is based on MMU2
BA/CA, the Rx Loop on that side can be set from the near-end EEM, see Section
7.4.3.
|
|

Figure 31 MMU2 BA/CA Loop

Figure 32 Radio Terminal loops
Section
7.4.2 and Section
11.148 give more information on how to set loops.
This procedure describes how to set a loop on an interface in order to locate
a fault.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
If the interface is used, the loop will disturb the traffic.
|
- Note:
- An active loop will disable notifications from
the interface.
To set a loop:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the unit that contains the interface on which you want to set a loop.
- Note:
- A loop can also be set when the interface is
selected in the Navigation Tree.
- On the Tools menu, click
Loops.
- On the Loops page, in the
<IF type> Interface list, select the interface on which you want
to set a loop.
- In the Loop options list,
select loop type. See Table
24 for a description of the loop types available for a specific interface.
- Click Add. The loop is
added to the Active loops list. The loop is removed by clicking
Remove or Remove All.
- Note:
- It is also possible to handle loops from the
Activities page, see Section
11.146.
This procedure describes how to set a loop on the RAU IF on a far-end radio
terminal in order to locate a fault.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
If the interface is used, the loop will disturb the traffic.
|
- Note:
- An active loop will disable notifications from
the interface.
To set an Rx Loop on a far-end radio terminal:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click an MMU2 BA/CA or RAU IF for the near-end terminal.
- On the Tools menu, click
Loops.
- On the Loops page, click
Show Far End to see the loop options for the far-end terminal. If the
far-end terminal is protected (1+1) there are two links, one for each RAU IF.
- Under Far End, in the
Loop options list, click Add to activate the Rx Loop. The loop
is added to the Active loops list. The loop is removed by clicking
Remove or Remove All.
The NE holds an Error Log containing information about internal hardware and
software errors as well as restarts and equipment alarms. The Error Log
comprises two files, <hostname>_active.elog and <hostname>_passive.elog.
- Note:
- Evaluation of the Error Log requires deep
knowledge about the system. Contact your Ericsson support for more
information.
The following tasks are covered:
Uploading the Error Log will load the <hostname>_active.elog and <hostname>_passive.elog files to the FTP server.
To upload the Error Log:
- The Error Log will be uploaded to
the <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_error_log folder. To avoid
overwriting an existing Error Log from the same NE, add the extension .old to the existing files, for example <hostname>_active.elog.old.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Fault menu, click
Load Error Log.
- Under Error Log File,
select Upload to FTP server.
- Under FTP, do one of the
following:
- If the
Error Log should be stored on a remote FTP server, select Remote server @
<IP address>.
- If the
Error Log should be stored on the PC, select Local server. Specify
User Name and Password.
- Click Apply.
Deleting the Error Log will delete the <hostname>_active.elog file from the NE.
To delete the Error Log:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Fault menu, click
Load Error Log.
- Under Error Log File,
select Delete error log from Network Element.
- Click Apply.
This section contains instructions for typical performance management
tasks.
The following tasks are covered:
This procedure describes how to specify the PM Start Time for 24 hours
performance data error counting interval.
To specify the PM start time:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Configuration menu,
click the Basic NE menu.
- On the Basic NE
Configuration page, under General Settings, type the PM Start
Time (hh:mm where mm is 00, 15, 30 or 45).
- Click Apply.
To be able to view performance data for interfaces, PM view must be
enabled.
- Note:
- Performance data (RF power) for the RF
interface is always available, that is, you do not need to enable PM
view.
To enable PM view:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the interface for which you want to display performance data.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Configuration.
- On the Configuration page
for the interface, make sure Enable PM View is selected.
- Click Apply.
To view performance data:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the interface for which you want to display performance data.
- Click the Performance menu.
- The Performance Data page
for the selected interface is displayed.
This procedure describes how to run a Bit Error Ratio Test (BERT) on a DS1
interface for performance measurement. The interface can be selected from the NE
or any unit holding a DS1 interface. A Pseudo Random Bit Sequence (PRBS) with
test pattern 215 - 1 is sent on the selected interface.

Figure 33 Bit Error Ratio Test (BERT)
Several BERTs can be executed concurrently with the following
limitations:
- One BERT per plug-in unit
- One BERT on
a protected 1+1 DS1 SNCP interface per NE
|
 |
Caution! |
|
If the interface is used, the BERT will disturb the traffic.
|
To start a BERT:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the unit that holds the DS1 interface you want to test. Alternatively,
click the NE name.
- On the Tools menu, click
Test.
- On the Test page, under
Bit Error Ratio Test - BERT, select the interface on which you want to
run a BERT.
- Click Start Test. The
interface is added to the Running Tests list, indicating that the BERT
is running on the interface.
To stop a BERT:
- On the Test page, in the
Running Tests list, locate the interface and then click Stop
Test. The interface is removed from the Running Tests list and
inserted in the Previous Test Results list, where the BER result and
the elapsed time for the test is displayed.
- Note:
- It is also possible to handle BERTs from the
Activities page, see Section
11.146.
This section covers the following:
Two user names are supported.

Figure 34 Logging in to the EEM
This user can only see the configuration. The default password is ericsson.
To prevent unauthorized access to the system it is recommended to change the
password. This should be done during the initial setup, see Section
5.3. However, the default password can always be used for local access of
NPU2 A/NPU1 BA.
This user can view and change the configuration. The default password is ericsson.
To prevent unauthorized access to the system it is recommended to change the
password. This should be done during the initial setup, see Section
5.3. However, the default password can always be used for local access of
NPU2 A/NPU1 BA and NPU1 ANSI in Node/NPU Installation mode.
The control_user can change the passwords, see Section
9.2.
This procedure describes how to change the control_user and view_user
passwords when the NE is in Normal mode.
- Note:
- Only the control_user is authorized to change
the passwords.
To change the passwords:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Security menu, click
Security
- On the Security page there
are two passwords to change:
- To change
the control_user password:
- Under Set control_user,
in the Password box, type the new password.
- Under Set control_user,
in the Confirm Password box, repeat the new password.
- To change
the view_user password:
- Under Set view_user, in
the Password box, type the new password.
- Under Set view_user, in
the Confirm Password box, repeat the new password.
- Click Apply.
- Note:
- You have to log in again if you have changed
the control_user password.
- Note:
- This section applies only to NPU1 ANSI. For an
NPU2 A/NPU1 BA, the control_user can always access the NE locally using the
default password and change the passwords from the Security page, see Section
11.162.
This procedure describes how to set new passwords in case the existing
passwords have been lost.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Use this function restrictively and only when you have lost
the passwords to an already installed NE.
|
- Note:
- The NE is accessed in Node Installation mode.
Configure the PC to use a dynamic IP address obtained from the DHCP server in
the NE or alternatively use the static IP address 10.0.0.2. For more information on IP addressing, see Section
3.3.3.
To set new passwords:
- Switch off and switch on the power
supply.

Figure 35 Entering Node Installation mode
- While the Fault (red), Power
(green) and BR (yellow) LEDs on the NPU1 ANSI are ON (NE power up), press the
BR button gently and release it. The BR (yellow) LED will start flashing,
indicating that the NE is in Node Installation mode.
- Connect the Ethernet cable
(twisted pair) to the 10/100BASE-T port.
- Start a Web browser and enter the
URL http://10.0.0.1/.
- In the Enter
Network Password dialog box, type the user name and password, and
click OK. For more information see Section
9.1.
- On the Tools menu, click
Change Password.
- On the Change Password
page, click Configure Basic Security.
- On the Security page, there
are two passwords to set:
- To change
the control_user password:
- Under Set control_user,
in the Password box, type the new password.
- Under Set control_user,
in the Confirm Password box, repeat the new password.
- To change
the view_user password:
- Under Set view_user, in
the Password box, type the new password.
- Under Set view_user, in
the Confirm Password box, repeat the new password.
- Click Apply and then click
Next.
- On the Change Password
page, click Finish Installation.
- On the Finish Installation
page, click Apply.
- When the Installation
Finished page is displayed the NE will make a warm restart and run in
Normal mode.
- Make sure the PC is properly
configured regarding the use of DHCP server. The configuration defines if
dynamic or static IP addressing is used. For information on how to configure
the use of DHCP server, see Section
3.3.3.
- Find out the IP address of the NE,
typically from the site documentation or the information plate of the NE.
Start a Web browser and enter the URL http://<IP address>.
- Note:
- Installation mode can always be left by
pressing the BR button on the front of the NPU1 ANSI.
This section describes hardware maintenance procedures.
- Note:
- Follow the recommendations in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual on
troubleshooting and how to handle cables and plug-in units.
The following tasks are covered:
- Adding and
Removing Plug-in Units, see Section
10.1.
- Replacing an LTU 16xDS1, LTU 16/1, LTU 12xDS1, LTU 155, ETU2, or
SMU2 ANSI (co-siting), see Section
10.2.
- Replacing an MMU2 or SMU2 ANSI (protection), see Section
10.3.
- Replacing an MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
10.4.
- Replacing a PFU, see Section
10.5.
- Replacing an NPU1 ANSI, see Section
10.6.
- Replacing an NPU1 BA, see Section
10.7.
- Replacing an NPU2 A, see Section
10.8.
- Replacing a Radio Unit, see Section
10.9.
- Changing the Traffic Capacity of a Radio Terminal with
MMU2, see Section
10.10.
- Changing the Traffic Capacity of a Radio Terminal with MMU2
BA/CA, see Section
10.11.
- Changing an Unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal to a Protected
(1+1) Radio Terminal with MMU2, see Section
10.12.
- Changing an Unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal to a Protected
(1+1) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
10.13.
- Changing the Traffic Capacity of an SMU2 ANSI (co-siting),
see Section
10.14.
Each position in the AMM has a state, indicating whether a plug-in unit is
inserted in that position, and if there are any problems associated with that
plug-in unit in that position.
If there is a problem, this is shown on the NE Alarms and Status page
as an icon on that position. The position state icon looks like this:
. If you place
the pointer on the icon, a ToolTip of the problem is shown.
|
A position may be in one of the following states: |
| Valid Unit |
|
There are no problems with a plug-in
unit of this type in this position.
Since there are no problems, no icon is shown. |
|
| Free |
|
There is no plug-in unit in this
position and the position is not reserved.
Since there are no problems, no icon is shown. |
|
| Inaccessible Unit |
|
The plug-in unit has been removed
from this position and the position is reserved for plug-in units of the
same type.
Whenever you remove a plug-in unit from the AMM, the position where it
was inserted remains reserved for plug-in units of the same type. The
configuration of the removed unit is saved in the NE, so that when you
insert a compatible replacement unit, it will automatically get the
configuration of the old unit.
If you are not going to insert a replacement plug-in unit in this
position, you can clear the reservation, see Section
10.1.4. This will make the position Free.
Clicking the icon,
opens the Clear Reservation page, see Section
11.99. |
|
| Wrong Unit |
|
The plug-in unit in this position
cannot use the configuration that is saved for this position.
To use a plug-in unit of a different type, you need to clear the
reservation, see Section
10.1.3. After clearing the reservation, the position will be put in
status Valid Unit if there are no problems with having the plug-in unit in
this position.
Clicking the icon,
opens the Clear Reservation page, see Section
11.99. |
|
| Missing License |
|
When this plug-in unit was inserted,
the total number of plug-in units in the AMM became more than 10, but no
license for the optional feature AMM 20p Slot
Extension was available. Only applicable for AMM 20p.
The icon is
shown on the position.
A license for AMM 20p Slot Extension allows you
to use all positions in the AMM. |
|
| Wrong Position |
|
The plug-in unit is not allowed in
this position.
The icon is
shown on the position.
Follow the rules and recommendations in the MINI-LINK
TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual. |
|
| Insufficient Resources |
|
The NE does not have the resources
to handle this plug-in unit.
The icon is
shown on the position.
For example, the backplane can only handle traffic from eight LTU 155
units. |
|
| Unsupported Unit |
|
The plug-in unit is of a type that
is not recognized by the NE.
The icon is
shown on the position.
For example, this can happen if you insert a plug-in unit that was
released after the release of the software baseline running on the NE.
Make sure you are using the latest system software. |
|
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) may damage the equipment.
Always use an approved ESD wrist strap to avoid damage to components
fitted on printed circuit boards.
|
This procedure describes how to insert a plug-in unit in a Free position,
that is, the position is not reserved for any type of plug-in unit.
To add a new plug-in unit to a Free position:
- Remove the dummy unit.
- Insert the new plug-in unit and
fit the cables as described in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor
Installation Manual.
- Note:
- Make sure the software baseline supports the
new plug-in unit before inserting it. Perform a software upgrade if
necessary, see Section
6.13.1.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Fault menu, click
Alarms and Status and make sure that the
icon is not
shown.
- Configure the plug-in unit and its
interfaces, see Section
6.
- On the applicable Alarms and
Status page, make sure there are no active alarms.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) may damage the equipment.
Always use an approved ESD wrist strap to avoid damage to components
fitted on printed circuit boards.
|
This procedure describes how to insert a plug-in unit in a position that is
reserved for a different type of plug-in unit.
- Note:
- To replace a plug-in unit with a plug-in unit
of the same type, see the specific procedures for replacing plug-in units in
Section
10.
To add a new plug-in unit in a reserved position:
- Insert the new plug-in unit and
fit the cables as described in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor
Installation Manual.
- Note:
- Make sure the software baseline supports the
new plug-in unit before inserting it. Perform a software upgrade if
necessary, see Section
6.13.1.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Tools menu, click
Clear Reservation.
- Select the Clear check box
for the position with state Wrong Unit.
- Click Apply.
- On the Fault menu, click
Alarms and Status and make sure that the
icon is not
shown.
- Configure the plug-in unit and its
interfaces, see Section
6.
- On the applicable Alarms and
Status page, make sure there are no active alarms.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) may damage the equipment.
Always use an approved ESD wrist strap to avoid damage to components
fitted on printed circuit boards.
|
This procedure describes how to remove a plug-in unit from an AMM when that
position should be left Free.
- Disconnect all cables from the
plug-in unit.
- Undo the two screws on the
latches.
- Press the BR button gently and
release it. This is a request to take the plug-in unit Out of Service and all
traffic related alarms will be disabled.
- Note:
- The BR button should be pressed before the
plug-in unit is removed, even if the Power (green) LED is
OFF.

Figure 36 Pressing the BR button
- Disconnect all cables from the
plug-in unit.
- Undo the two screws on the
latches.
- Press the BR button gently and
release it. This is a request to take the plug-in unit Out of Service and all
traffic related alarms will be disabled.
- Note:
- The BR button should be pressed before the
plug-in unit is removed, even if the Power (green) LED is OFF.
- Wait until the BR (yellow) LED is
ON and then remove the plug-in unit within 60 minutes. If the LED is not ON
within 60 seconds, press and release the BR button again. Wait another 60
seconds and if the LED is still not ON, remove the unit anyway.
- Note:
- If you do not remove the plug-in unit within
60 minutes, it is automatically taken into service. You can also take the
plug-in unit into service before the end of the 60 minutes by pressing the
BR button again.
- Insert a dummy unit in the empty
position. All free positions must be covered by dummy units to comply with EMC
and cooling specifications.
- Tighten the two screws on the
latches of the dummy unit.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NE.
- On the Tools menu, click
Clear Reservation.
- Select the Clear check box
for the position with state Inaccessible Unit.
- Click Apply.
- On the Fault menu, click
Alarms and Status and make sure that the
icon is not
shown.
This procedure describes how to replace an LTU 16xDS1, LTU 12xDS1, LTU 155
ANSI, ETU2, SMU2 ANSI (co-siting).
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) may damage the equipment.
Always use an approved ESD wrist strap to avoid damage to components
fitted on printed circuit boards.
|
- Note:
- When replacing an LTU 155 ANSI there is a check
that the SW load module matches the current software release. If required, an
automatic download of a new load module takes place. This requires a working
connection to the FTP server and that the load module is present in the <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_system_release
folder.
- Note:
- If an SMU2 ANSI has been used for protection it
is recommended to do a preset to factory settings before using it for
co-siting. For more information on how to do a preset, see MSM User Guide or MSM online
Help.
To replace the plug-in unit:
- Disconnect all cables from the
plug-in unit.
- Undo the two screws on the
latches.
- Press the BR button gently and
release it. This is a request to take the plug-in unit Out of Service and all
traffic related alarms will be disabled.
- Note:
- The BR button should be pressed before the
plug-in unit is removed, even if the Power (green) LED is
OFF.

Figure 37 Pressing the BR button
- Wait until the BR (yellow) LED is
ON and then remove the plug-in unit within 60 minutes. If the LED is not ON
within 60 seconds, press and release the BR button again. Wait another 60
seconds and if the LED is still not ON, remove the unit anyway.
- Note:
- If you do not remove the plug-in unit within
60 minutes, it is automatically taken into service. You can also take the
plug-in unit into service before the end of the 60 minutes by pressing the
BR button again.
- Insert the new plug-in unit. The
plug-in unit will automatically be taken into service with the configuration
used by the previous plug-in unit.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Be careful when inserting the LTU 12xDS1 as bending the
unit, or placing it outside the guides, could cause short-circuits or
damages.
|
- Tighten the two screws on the
latches.
- Connect all cables to the plug-in
unit.
- Start the LCT. For more
information, see Section
3.3.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the plug-in unit type being replaced.
- On the Alarms and Status
page, make sure there are no active alarms.
This procedure describes how to replace an MMU2, or an SMU2 used for
protection in a (1+1) Radio Terminal.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) may damage the equipment.
Always use an approved ESD wrist strap to avoid damage to components
fitted on printed circuit boards.
|
- Note:
- To avoid transmission using the wrong frequency
or output power it is recommended to insert an MMU2 with factory settings. If
a preset to factory settings is required, use MSM with the unit inserted in an
empty position in the AMM. MSM is launched from the MMU2 Configuration
page, see Section
11.35.
To replace the plug-in unit:
- MMU2 only: Disconnect the station
radio cable.
- Undo the two screws on the
latches.
- Press the BR button gently and
release it. This is a request to take the plug-in unit Out of Service and all
traffic related alarms will be disabled.
- Note:
- The BR button should be pressed before the
plug-in unit is removed, even if the Power (green) LED is
OFF.

Figure 38 Pressing the BR button
- Wait until the BR (yellow) LED is
ON and then remove the plug-in unit within 60 minutes. If the LED is not ON
within 60 seconds, press and release the BR button again. Wait another 60
seconds and if the LED is still not ON, remove the unit anyway.
- Note:
- If you do not remove the plug-in unit within
60 minutes, it is automatically taken into service. You can also take the
plug-in unit into service before the end of the 60 minutes by pressing the
BR button again.
- Insert the new plug-in unit. The
plug-in unit will automatically be taken into service.
- Tighten the two screws on the
latches.
- Connect the station radio cable.
- Start the LCT. For more
information, see Section
3.3.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the plug-in unit type being replaced.
- On the Configuration menu,
click Configuration.
- On the Configuration page,
click Perform AM Setup and Hop Setup.
- In MSM perform a complete
AM Setup and Hop Setup. Follow the instructions in MSM User
Guide or MSM online Help.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the plug-in unit being replaced.
- On the Alarms and Status
page, make sure there are no active alarms.
This procedure describes how to replace an MMU2 BA or MMU2 CA.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) may damage the equipment.
Always use an approved ESD wrist strap to avoid damage to components
fitted on printed circuit boards.
|
- Note:
- To avoid transmission using the wrong frequency
or output power it is recommended to insert an MMU2 BA/CA with factory
settings.
- Note:
- When replacing an MMU2 BA or MMU2 CA there is a
check that the SW load module matches the current software baseline. If
required, an automatic software upgrade takes place. This requires a working
connection to the FTP server and that the load module is present in the <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_system_release
folder.
To replace the plug-in unit:
- Disconnect the station radio
cable.
- Undo the two screws on the
latches.
- Press the BR button gently and
release it. This is a request to take the plug-in unit Out of Service and all
traffic related alarms will be disabled.
- Note:
- The BR button should be pressed before the
plug-in unit is removed, even if the Power (green) LED is
OFF.

Figure 39 Pressing the BR button
- Wait until the BR (yellow) LED is
ON and then remove the plug-in unit within 60 minutes. If the LED is not ON
within 60 seconds, press and release the BR button again. Wait another 60
seconds and if the LED is still not ON, remove the unit anyway.
- Note:
- If you do not remove the plug-in unit within
60 minutes, it is automatically taken into service. You can also take the
plug-in unit into service before the end of the 60 minutes by pressing the
BR button again.
- Insert the new plug-in unit. The
plug-in unit will automatically be taken into service.
- Tighten the two screws on the
latches.
- Connect the station radio cable.
- Start the LCT. For more
information, see Section
3.3.
- Do one of the following:
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the MMU being replaced.
- On the Alarms and Status
page, make sure there are no active alarms.
This procedure describes how to replace a PFU1 (AMM 20p), PFU2 (AMM 6p)
or PFU3 (AMM 6p B). PFU1 and PFU3 can be used in redundant power
configurations.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) may damage the equipment.
Always use an approved ESD wrist strap to avoid damage to components
fitted on printed circuit boards.
|
To replace the plug-in unit:
- Undo the two screws on the
latches.
- Disconnect all cables from the
plug-in unit.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Make sure the external power is switched off when working
with the DC cable.
|
- Press the BR button gently and
release it. This is a request to take the plug-in unit Out of Service and will
suppress notifications from the PFU, including alarms from an FAU1 connected
to a PFU1.
- Note:
- The BR button should be pressed before the
plug-in unit is removed, even if the Power (green) LED is
OFF.

Figure 40 Pressing the BR button
- Wait until the BR (yellow) LED is
ON and then remove the plug-in unit within 60 minutes. If the LED is not ON
within 60 seconds, press and release the BR button again. Wait another 60
seconds and if the LED is still not ON, remove the unit anyway.
- Note:
- A PFU failure could mean that the LEDs are
not working.
- Note:
- If you do not remove the plug-in unit within
60 minutes, it is automatically taken into service. You can also take the
plug-in unit into service before the end of the 60 minutes by pressing the
BR button again.
- Insert the new plug-in unit.
- Tighten the two screws on the
latches.
- Connect all cables to the plug-in
unit and switch on the external power supply.
This will initiate a power up of the plug-in unit and for a non-redundant
power configuration a power up of the NE.
- Start the LCT. For more
information, see Section
3.3.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the new PFU.
- On the PFU Alarms and
Status page, make sure there are no active alarms.
The NPU 8x2, which holds the NE configuration data, can be replaced without
disturbing all traffic not directly connected to the unit. The procedure is
performed while the NE is running in NPU Installation mode, see also Section
3.3.2.1.
- Note:
- The NE is accessed in NPU Installation mode.
Configure the PC to use a dynamic IP address obtained from the DHCP server in
the NE or alternatively use the static IP address 10.0.0.2. For more information on IP addressing, see Section
3.3.3.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) may damage the equipment.
Always use an approved ESD wrist strap to avoid damage to components
fitted on printed circuit boards.
|
To replace the NPU1 ANSI:
- You need a backup configuration
file on the FTP server on your PC.
The configuration file must have the following path: <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_backup_configuration\<hostname.cfg>. The file is typically fetched from
the same directory on a remote FTP server.
- Note:
- If you do not have a configuration file you
can, if possible, try to upload the existing configuration file from the NE,
see Section
11.89.
The final alternative is to make a complete setup of the NE, see Section
5.
- Disconnect all cables from the
plug-in unit and undo the two screws on the latches.
- Press the BR button gently and
release it. This is a request to take the plug-in unit Out of Service and all
traffic related alarms will be disabled.
- Note:
- The BR button should be pressed before the
plug-in unit is removed, even if the Power (green) LED is
OFF.

Figure 41 Pressing the BR button
- Wait until the BR (yellow) LED is
ON and then remove the plug-in unit within 60 minutes. If the LED is not ON
within 60 seconds, press and release the BR button again. Wait another 60
seconds and if the LED is still not ON, remove the unit anyway.
- Note:
- If you do not remove the plug-in unit within
60 minutes, it is automatically taken into service. You can also take the
plug-in unit into service before the end of the 60 minutes by pressing the
BR button again.
- Insert the new NPU1 ANSI. Press
and release the BR button while the Fault (red), Power (green) and BR (yellow)
LEDs are ON (NPU power up). The BR (yellow) LED will start flashing,
indicating that the NE is in NPU Installation mode.
- Tighten the two screws on the
latches.
- Connect all cables, including the
Ethernet cable (twisted pair) to the 10/100BASE-T port.
- Start a Web browser and enter the
URL http://10.0.0.1/.
- In the Enter
Network Password dialog box, type the user name and password, and
click OK. For more information see Section
9.1.
- On the Restore NPU
Configuration page, do one of the following:
- Click
Download to open the Load Configuration page, where you can
download a configuration file from the default FTP server.
On the Load Configuration page, type the name of the configuration
file in the File Name box and then click Apply.
On the Load Configuration Progress page, click Update
Progress until the download is finished.
- Click
Factory Settings to prepare the system to remove all configurations.
If the NE is returned to factory settings, you will need to make a complete
setup of the NE.
- When the configuration has been
loaded, click Activate on the Restore NPU Configuration page.
If the configuration requires new software to be loaded, this will be done
automatically. This requires that the software is present in the <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_system_release folder.
A progress bar displays the progress of the software upgrade. When the
download and software upgrade is finished, the NE will make a warm restart.
After the restart the NE will run in Normal mode with the correct
configuration.
- Type the URL http://<IP address> in the
browser Address bar. The IP address is typically found in the site
documentation or on the information plate of the NE. See also Section
3.3.2.3.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NPU1 ANSI.
- On the NPU1 ANSI Alarms and
Status page, make sure there are no active alarms.
The NPU1 BA, which holds the NE configuration data, can be replaced without
disturbing all traffic not directly connected to the unit.
The procedure for replacing the NPU1 BA is different depending on
whether it is equipped with an RMM or not. The procedures are described in the
following sections:
- Replacing an
NPU1 B with RMMReplacing an NPU1 BA with
RMM, see Section
10.7.1.
- Replacing an NPU1 B without RMMReplacing an NPU1 BA without RMM, see Section
10.7.2.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) may damage the equipment.
Always use an approved ESD wrist strap to avoid damage to components
fitted on printed circuit boards.
|
To replace an NPU1 BA that is equipped with an RMM:
- Disconnect all cables from the
NPU1 BA and undo the two screws on the latches.
- Press the BR button gently and
release it. This is a request to take the plug-in unit Out of Service and all
traffic related alarms will be disabled.
- Note:
- The BR button should be pressed before the
plug-in unit is removed, even if the Power (green) LED is
OFF.

Figure 42 Pressing the BR button
- Wait until the BR (yellow) LED is
ON and then remove the plug-in unit within 60 minutes. If the LED is not ON
within 60 seconds, press and release the BR button again. Wait another 60
seconds and if the LED is still not ON, remove the unit anyway.
- Note:
- If you do not remove the plug-in unit within
60 minutes, it is automatically taken into service. You can also take the
plug-in unit into service before the end of the 60 minutes by pressing the
BR button again.
- Move the RMM from the old
NPU1 BA to the new NPU1 BA. The location of the RMM is shown in Figure
43.

Figure 43 RMM Location on NPU1 BA
- Insert the new NPU1 BA.
- Tighten the two screws on the
latches.
- Connect all cables, including the
USB cable.
- Start a Web browser and enter the
URL http://<IP address>.
- In the Enter
Network Password dialog box, type the user name and password, and
click OK. For more information see Section
9.1.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NPU1 BA.
- On the NPU1 B Alarms and
Status page, make sure there are no active alarms.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) may damage the equipment.
Always use an approved ESD wrist strap to avoid damage to components
fitted on printed circuit boards.
|
To replace an NPU1 B that is not equipped with an RMM:
- You need a backup configuration
file on the FTP server on your PC.
The configuration file must have the following path: <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_backup_configuration\<hostname.cfg>. The file is typically fetched from
the same directory on a remote FTP server.
- Note:
- If you do not have a configuration file you
can, if possible, try to upload the existing configuration file from the NE,
see Section
11.89.
The final alternative is to make a complete setup of the NE, see Section
5.
- Disconnect all cables from the
NPU1 B and undo the two screws on the latches.
- Press the BR button gently and
release it. This is a request to take the plug-in unit Out of Service and all
traffic related alarms will be disabled.
- Note:
- The BR button should be pressed before the
plug-in unit is removed, even if the Power (green) LED is
OFF.

Figure 44 Pressing the BR button
- Wait until the BR (yellow) LED is
ON and then remove the plug-in unit within 60 minutes. If the LED is not ON
within 60 seconds, press and release the BR button again. Wait another 60
seconds and if the LED is still not ON, remove the unit anyway.
- Note:
- If you do not remove the plug-in unit within
60 minutes, it is automatically taken into service. You can also take the
plug-in unit into service before the end of the 60 minutes by pressing the
BR button again.
- Insert the new NPU1 BA. Press
and release the BR button while the Fault (red), Power (green) and BR (yellow)
LEDs are ON (NPU power up). The BR (yellow) LED will start flashing,
indicating that the NE is in NPU Installation mode.
- Tighten the two screws on the
latches.
- Connect all cables, including the
USB cable.
- Start a Web browser and enter the
URL http://10.0.0.1/.
- In the Enter
Network Password dialog box, type the user name and password, and
click OK. For more information see Section
9.1.
- If you have a configuration file,
click Download on the Restore NPU Configuration page.
If you do not have a configuration file, click Current or Factory
Settings and then click Activate. You can skip the rest of this
procedure; you need to make a complete setup of the NE, see Section
5.
- On the Load Configuration
page, type the name of the configuration file in the File Name box and
then click Apply.
- On the Load Configuration
Progress page, click Update Progress until the download is
finished.
- On the Restore NPU
Configuration page, click Activate.
If the configuration file requires new software to be loaded, this will be
done automatically. This requires that the software is present in the <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_system_release folder.
A progress bar displays the progress of the software upgrade. When the
download and software upgrade is finished, the NE will make a warm restart.
After the restart the NE will run in Normal mode with the selected
configuration.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NPU1 BA.
- On the NPU1 BA Alarms and
Status page, make sure there are no active alarms.
The NPU2 A supplies the other units in the AMM with power so the NE will be
down when replacing the NPU2. All cables and units should be handled according
to instructions in the MINI-LINK TN ANSI Installation
Manual.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Make sure the external power is switched off when working
with the DC cable.
|
To replace the NPU2 A:
- Switch off the external power.
- Disconnect all cables from the NPU
A2 and undo the two screws on the latches.
- Remove the old NPU2 A.
- Move the RMM from the old NPU2 A
to the new NPU2 A. The location of the RMM is shown in Figure
46.

Figure 45 RMM Location on NPU2

Figure 46 RMM Location on NPU2 A
- Insert the new NPU2 A and tighten
the two screws on the latches.
- Connect all cables to the unit,
including the USB cable between the unit and the PC.
- Switch on the external power.
- Start a Web browser and enter the
URL http://<IP address>.
- In the Enter
Network Password dialog box, type the user name and password, and
click OK. For more information see Section
9.1.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the NPU2 A.
- On the NPU2 A Alarms and
Status page, make sure there are no active alarms.
This procedure describes how to replace a radio Unit (RAU).
- Disconnect the station radio cable
from the MMU.
- Replace the RAU.
Follow the instructions in the MINI-LINK TN, MINI-LINK
HC, MINI-LINK E, Outdoor Installation Manual when replacing the RAU.
- Reconnect the station radio cable
to the MMU.
One of the following happens:
- If the new
RAU is fully compatible with the old RAU (supports the same functions and
frequency), it will automatically get the same configuration as the old RAU.
- If the new
RAU is incompatible with the old RAU, it will get default values for the
parameters that cannot be set. The system will also log a Hot Swap Incomplete event and the unit will be considered
as Wrong unit, see Section
10.1.1.
- Start the LCT and make sure the no
Hot Swap Incomplete events are logged.
- Note:
- If you intend to replace the old RAU with an
incompatible RAU, you need to configure the new RAU manually before
proceeding. Follow the procedures in Section
6.5.
- Align the new RAU.
Follow the instructions in the MINI-LINK TN, MINI-LINK
HC, MINI-LINK E, Outdoor Installation Manual when aligning the new
RAU.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the RAU being replaced.
- On the Alarms and Status
page, make sure there are no active alarms.
This procedure describes how to change the traffic capacity of an unprotected
(1+0) or protected (1+1) Radio Terminal (MMU2 only).
To change the traffic capacity:
- Delete the existing traffic
routings for DS1s. Follow the instructions in Section
6.9.2.
- In the Navigation Tree,
select an MMU2 in the terminal.
- On the
MMU2 Configuration page, click Perform AM Setup and Hop
Setup. In MSM, perform AM Setup and Hop Setup to change the traffic
capacity. Follow the instructions in MSM User Guide or
MSM online Help.
- Create new traffic routings for
DS1s. Follow the instructions in Section
6.9.1.
- On the MMU2 Alarms and
Status page, make sure there are no active alarms.
This procedure describes how to change the traffic capacity of an unprotected
(1+0) or protected (1+1) Radio Terminal (MMU2 BA/CA only).
To change the traffic capacity:
- In the Navigation Tree,
select an MMU2 BA/CA in the terminal.
- Click the Configuration
menu to open the MMU2 B/C ConfigurationMMU2 BA/CA
Configuration page.
- Under Traffic Capacity -
Modulation, change the traffic capacity, modulation and frame format.
- Click Apply.
- On the MMU2 Alarms and
Status page, make sure there are no active alarms.
This procedure describes how to change an unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal to
a protected (1+1) Radio Terminal.
- Insert the new MMU2 and SMU2 ANSI,
see Section
10.1.
- Note:
- The 1+1 configuration is only possible if the
units are placed in adjacent AMM positions according to specifications in
MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual.
- Delete the existing traffic
routings for DS1s. Follow the instructions in Section
6.9.2.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the SMU2 ANSI. On the SMU2 ANSI Configuration page, select
Protection and click Apply.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click one of the MMU2s in the protected terminal.
- On the MMU2 Configuration
page, under Protection Mode, select Prepare for 1+1
configuration.
- Click Apply.
- Select In Service and clear
the Enable check box, for all three units, and click Apply.
- Click Perform AM Setup and Hop
Setup. In MSM, perform AM Setup and Hop Setup. Follow the instructions in
MSM User Guide or MSM online
Help.
- Carry out the outdoor equipment
installation, indoor and outdoor radio cabling, and antenna alignment. Follow
the instructions in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation
Manual and MINI-LINK TN, MINI-LINK HC, MINI-LINK E
Outdoor Installation Manual.
- Configure the applicable
interfaces:
- Create new traffic routings for
DS1s. Follow the instructions in Section
6.9.1.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click one of the MMU2s in the protected terminal.
- On the MMU2 Configuration
page, select the Enable check box.
- On one of the MMU2 Alarms and
Status pages, make sure there are no active alarms.
This procedure describes how to change an unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal to
a protected (1+1) Radio Terminal.
- Note:
- 1+1 configurations are only possible if the
units are placed in adjacent AMM positions according to specifications in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual.
- Insert the new MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
10.1.
- Using the new MMU, configure a
temporary unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal, as described in Section
6.5.1.
- Note:
- Do not turn on the transmitter when creating
the temporary terminal.
- Note:
- To be able to configure a protected terminal,
the following conditions apply:
- The temporary terminal
must be configured to use the same traffic capacity, modulation method,
and identity as the existing terminal.
- For 1+1
Hot configurations, both RAUs must have the same
frequency.
- For 1+1
Work configurations, both RAUs must have different
frequencies.
- When the temporary terminal is set
up, configure a protected terminal as described in Section
6.5.2.
- In the Navigation Tree,
click one of the MMUs in the protected terminal.
- On the Alarms and Status
page, make sure there are no active alarms.
The traffic capacity of an SMU2 ANSI in co-siting mode interfacing MINI-LINK
E equipment is changed as described below.
To change the traffic capacity:
- Delete the existing traffic
routings for DS1s. Follow the instructions in Section
6.9.2 .
- In the Navigation Tree,
click the SMU2.
- Click the Configuration
menu.
- On the SMU2 ANSI
Configuration page, under Traffic Capacity, select the new traffic
capacity and click Apply.
- Create new traffic routings for
DS1s. Follow the instructions in Section
6.9.1.
- On the SMU2 ANSI Alarms and
Status, make sure there are no active alarms.
This section gives information on all items available on the different pages
displayed when working with the EEM. Each page is described in a separate
section and the information is accessed from the EEM by clicking
Help.
- Note:
- Each figure in this section reflects a certain
setting of the equipment. This means that some of the objects described in the
text are not present in the figures.
This page provides a guided setup for configuration of Radio Terminals during
the initial setup. At least the terminals used for DCN communication must be set
up at this stage.

Figure 47 The Radio Terminal Configuration
page
- Factory Setting - Opens
the Factory Setting page, where you can revert the NE to factory
settings, see Section
11.11. Only available if there is an existing configuration file.
- To set up
Radio Terminals - A list of Radio Terminal units that can be configured.
For MMU2, SMU2 ANSI, clicking a link opens the unit's configuration page; for
MMU2 BA/CA, a second Radio Terminal Configuration page (described in Section
11.2) is opened. When the necessary Radio Terminals have been configured
you continue with Automatic Configuration, see Section
5.2, or Manual Configuration, see Section
5.3.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the installation wizard.
- Initial setup of a Radio
Terminal, see Section
5.1.
- Radio
Terminal Configuration page for MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
11.2.
This page provides a guided setup for configuration of MMU2 BA/CA Radio
Terminals during the initial setup.

Figure 48 Radio Terminal Configuration page for MMU2
BA/CA
- To set up Radio Terminal
<ID> - A list of configuration items. Clicking a link opens a
configuration page.
- To test
up Radio Terminal <ID> - A list of links to pages that can be used
to test the Radio Terminal.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the installation wizard.
This page provides a guided setup to configure the NE using a configuration
file. This includes configuration security, DCN and system parameters. Depending
on the contents of the configuration file this could be a complete configuration
excluding the parts configured with MSM.

Figure 49 The Automatic Configuration page
- Download Configuration
File - Opens the Load Configuration page, where you can download a
configuration file from the default FTP server, see Section
11.89. The default FTP server located on the PC with IP address 10.0.0.2. After the download an automatic software
upgrade is performed if necessary.
- View
Inventory and Configuration Report - Opens the View Report page,
where inventory and configuration information is displayed, see Section
11.77.
- Finish
Installation - Opens the Finish Installation page, see Section
11.6.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Automatic configuration of NE
parameters, see Section
5.2.
This page provides a guided setup to configure the NE without using a
configuration file.

Figure 50 The Manual Configuration page
- Perform Software
Upgrade - Opens the Software Upgrade - Installation Wizard page,
where an upgrade to a new baseline can be performed, see Section
11.5. The default FTP server is located on the PC with IP address 10.0.0.2.
- Configure
Basic Security - Opens the Security page, where passwords for the
control_user and view_user are set, see Section
11.162.
- Configure
Basic NE - Opens the Basic NE Configuration page, where general NE
parameters are set, see Section
11.15.
- Configure
DCN - Opens the LAN/Servers page page, where parameters for
Ethernet communication and DCN servers are set, see Section
11.16. Other pages for DCN configuration are also opened from this page.
- Configure
DS1 DCN (NPU1 ANSI NE only) - Opens the DS1 DCN Configuration page,
where an DS1 interface can be selected to carry DCN traffic.
- Finish
Installation - Opens the Finish Installation page, see Section
11.6.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Manual configuration of NE
parameters, see Section
5.3.
This page is used to perform an upgrade of baseline in the installation
wizard. The baseline is described in a Software Baseline Description File
(SBDF).

Figure 51 The Software Upgrade - Installation Wizard
page
- Current Baseline -
Information about the current baseline. If version control is disabled, N/A
will be displayed.
- Product
Number - The product number of the current baseline.
- Release - The
release state (version) of the current baseline.
- Conforming Modules
- Displays if the current software configuration is compliant with the
current baseline.
- Defined
by - Displays if the baseline is defined by Ericsson or not.
- Desired
Baseline - Information about the desired baseline.
- Note:
- The SBDF and the load modules must be stored
in specific folders under: <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_system_release\ml_tn_software,
see Section
3.2.1.2.
- Product
Number - The product number of the desired baseline.
- Release - The
release state (version) of the desired baseline.
- FTP -
Specifies parameters for the FTP server used for software upgrade.
- Remote
server @ <IP address> - Use the remote FTP server at the shown IP
address. The IP address can be changed on the LAN/Servers page,
described in Section
11.16.
- Local
server - Use a local FTP server with the specified IP address. Normally
this is the address of the PC, but it could also be a second remote FTP
server.
- PC
- Enters the IP address of the local PC.
- User
Name - The user name used to log in to the local FTP server.
- Password - The
password used to log in to the local FTP server.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- Start
Upgrade - Initiates the software upgrade.
- Note:
- Software upgrade to
MINI-LINK TN R3 requires a license. See Section
6.3 for more information on how to work with licenses.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the installation wizard.
This page is used to save the configuration in the installation wizard.

Figure 52 The Finish Installation page
- OK - Saves the
configuration and exits the installation wizard.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
This page is displayed when an NPU1 ANSI NE is making a warm restart after
leaving Node Installation mode. After the restart it will run in Normal mode.
The IP address of the NE has been changed and you will have to use this address
when you access the NE, see also Section
3.3.2.3.

Figure 53 The Installation Finished
page
This page provides a guided setup to change the password for the control_user
and view_user.

Figure 54 The Change Password page
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Use this function restrictively and only when you have lost
the passwords to an already installed NE.
|
- Configure Basic
Security - Opens the Security page, where passwords for the
control_user and view_user are set, see Section
11.162.
- Finish
Installation - Opens the Finish Installation page, see Section
11.6.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- How to replace lost passwords
on NPU1 ANSI, see Section
9.3.
This page provides a guided setup to activate the previous NPU software
release.

Figure 55 The Emergency Fallback page
- Perform Emergency
Fallback - Opens the Perform Emergency Fallback page, see Section
11.10.
- Finish
Installation - Opens the Finish Installation page, see Section
11.6.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- How to perform an emergency
fallback for NPU2 A, NPU1 BA, see Section
6.13.3.
- How to
perform an emergency fallback for NPU1 ANSI, see Section
6.13.4.
This page is used to activate the previous NPU software release.

Figure 56 The Perform Emergency Fallback
page
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Use this function restrictively and only in the unlikely
event that you have performed a software upgrade to a software version,
from which you cannot perform a full software upgrade back to a correct
version.
|
- OK - Activates the
previous NPU software.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
This page provides a link to the Delete Configuration File page, used
to delete an existing configuration file and revert the NE to factory setting,
see Section
11.12.

Figure 57 The Factory Setting page
This page is used to delete an existing configuration file and revert the NE
to factory setting.

Figure 58 The Delete Configuration File
page
- Apply - Deletes the
existing configuration file and opens the Configuration File Deleted
page, see Section
11.13. Only available if there is an existing configuration file.
- Back
- Returns to the Factory Setting page, see Section
11.11.
This page is displayed when a NE is restarting after a configuration file has
been deleted.

Figure 59 The Configuration File Deleted
page
This page provides a guide to restore the NE configuration, residing on the
NPU.

Figure 60 The Restore NPU Configuration
page
- Cause - Shows the cause
for entering NPU Installation Mode.
- View and
Activate Configuration - Lets you look at essential parts of
configurations from different sources and then activate one of them.
This page is used to set general NE parameters. It also allows configuration
of the desired status of PFU/FAU.

Figure 61 The Basic NE Configuration page
- Basic NE Data -
Specifies general information about the NE.
- NE
Name - The name of the NE.
- NE
Location - The physical location of the NE.
- NE
Contact - Contact information such as name and telephone number of the
system responsible person.
- NE IP
Address - The IP address of the NE, that is the internal router.
- Subnet
Mask - The subnet mask of the NE.
- Default
Gateway - Settings for the default gateway. Packets with unknown
destination are sent to this IP address.
- FAU
Settings - Specifies the desired status of the FAU (AMM 20p/AMM 6p B
only).
- In
Service - Sets the unit in operating mode.
- General
Settings - Specifies miscellaneous parameters of the NE.
- Hide
License Warnings - If a license for a feature is missing, the warning
message is suppressed when trying to activate that feature. Also, the
warning is not shown in the Alarm List.
- Hide
License Errors - The error is not shown in the Alarm List. Error
messages are still be shown when trying to use features without licenses.
- Date/Time - The
date (yyyy-mm-dd) and time (hh:mm) kept by the NE timer.
- Note:
- When an NTP server is available, this will
adjust the NE date and time.
- Alarm
Filter Time - The time between the occurrence of a defect and the
sending of an alarm. This applies also for sending a clear alarm when the
defect ceases. The time can be set in the range 1.0 - 10.0
seconds, in steps of 0.5 seconds.
- PM
Start Time - The time when 24 hour performance interval starts. The time
can be set in the range 00:00 - 23:45, in steps of 15 minutes.
- Automatic Backup -
Specifies that a backup of the configuration will be done each time the NE
configuration is saved. The backup is saved on the specified FTP
server.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the installation wizard.
This page is used to set parameters for LAN communication and DCN
servers.

Figure 62 The LAN/Servers Configuration
page
- LAN - Allows
configuration of the LAN interface on the NPU2 A/NPU1 BA.
- IP
Address - The IP address of the interface, inheriting the address of the
internal router.
- Subnet
Mask - The subnet mask of the interface, inheriting the subnet mask of
the internal router.
- Notifications Enable
- Enables notifications from the interface. .
- Administrative Status
In Service - Sets the interface in operating mode, enabling it for the
site LAN or Ethernet Bridge traffic (NPU2 A only).
- Speed - Specifies
the speed in Mbit/s and duplex mode or detects it automatically. When the
Auto Negotiation parameter is off a fixed value must be choosen and the
interface is forced to the setting without any negotiations.
- MDI-MDIX -
Specifies the MDI mode, that is selection of Rx/Tx.
- Auto - The mode is
detected automatically (default). A crossed or straight cable can be used
independent of the connected device.
- MDI
- Manual mode with Rx and Tx not switched. Use a straight cable to connect
to a router and a crossed cable to a PC.
- MDIX - Manual mode
with Rx and Tx switched. Use a straight cable to connect to a PC and a
crossed cable to a router.
- Size -- The MTU
size. Default value = 1500.
- Auto
Negotiation -- Enable Auto Negotiation of the interface capabilities for
speed and duplex mode.
- LAN
Status - Opens the LAN Status page, see Section
11.103.
- SNMP
Manager (Trap Receiver) - Specifies the SNMP Managers that supervise the
NE.
- Enable
Notifications - Enables traps sent to the SNMP Managers.
- SNMP
Manager - The IP address of an SNMP Manager.
- Port - The port
used for SNMP.
- Version - The SNMP
version.
- Network
Services - Specifies network services parameters.
- Domain - The domain
name of the NE.
- DNS
Server <nr> - The first, second and third DNS server for the NE.
- NTP
Server - The host name or IP address of the NTP server.
- DHCP
Address - The host name or IP address of the DHCP server the NE is a
relay for.
- FTP -
Specifies parameters for the FTP servers used for software upgrade and loading
of configuration files.
- Remote
FTP Server - The IP address of the remote FTP server. Normally this is
the address of a permanent FTP server in the network, but it could also be
an FTP server on the PC.
- User
Name - The user name used to log in to the remote FTP server.
- Password - The
password used to log in to the remote FTP server.
- Local
FTP Server - The IP address of the local FTP server. Normally this is
the address of the PC, but it could also be a second remote FTP server.
- User
Name - The user name used to log in to the local FTP server.
- Password - The
password used to log in to the local FTP server.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the installation wizard.
This page is used to configure the PPP interfaces. It can specifically be
used to change the default bandwidth of the OC-3/STS-3 PPP interfaces and to set
the number of DIG SC (2x64 kbit/s) for SMU2 ANSI in co-siting mode.

Figure 63 The PPP Configuration page
- PPP Interface - The
name of the interface.
- Administrative Status
- Specifies the desired status of the interface.
- Up
- Sets the interface in operating mode.
- Down - Sets the
interface in non-operating mode.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Selecting Down will disable the DCN communication
on the interface.
|
- Notifications -
Specifies if the interface should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the interface.
- IP
Address - Specifies the IP address of a numbered interface. The box should
be left empty for an un-numbered interface.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
It is recommended to set all interfaces destined to the
same NE as either numbered or un-numbered. Mixing both types may cause
DCN instability.
|
- Size
-- MRU size. Default 1500. Range 0-1500.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- PPP
Status - Opens the PPP Status page, see Section
11.105
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the installation wizard.
- How to configure the PPP
interfaces, see Section
6.11.2.
- How to
change the bandwidth of the OC-3/STS-3 PPP interfaces, see Section
6.11.2.1
- How to
change the number of DIG SC (2x64 kbit/s) for SMU2 ANSI in co-siting mode, see
Section
6.11.2.2
This page is used to configure static routes. A maximum of 100 static routes
is possible.

Figure 64 The Static Routing Configuration
page
- Create Static Route -
Specifies a new static route.
- Destination - The
destination IP address of this route.
- Route
Mask - The netmask for the destination IP address.
- Gateway - The
address of the next system on the route.
- Create - Creates
the static route and displays it under Current Static Routes.
- Current
Static Routes - Displays the static routes. Selecting a check box enables
deletion of the corresponding route.
- Modify - Opens the
Modify Route page, see Section
11.19.
- Clear
All - Clears all check boxes.
- Select
All - Selects all check boxes.
- Delete - Deletes
the selected routes.
- Static
Routing Status - Opens the Static Routing Status page, see Section
11.111.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the installation wizard.
This page is used to modify or delete a static route.

Figure 65 The Modify Static Route page
- Destination - The
destination IP address of this route.
- Route
Mask - The netmask for the destination IP address.
- Gateway - The address
of the next system on the route.
- OK -
Updates the static route and returns to the Static Routing
Configuration page, see Section
11.18.
- Cancel - Closes the
page without modifying the static route and returns to the Static Routing
Configuration page.
- Delete - Deletes the
static route and returns to the Static Routing Configuration page.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the installation wizard.
This page is used to create OSPF areas.

Figure 66 The OSPF Area Configuration page
- Create OSPF Area -
Specifies a new OSPF area.
- Net
Address - The IP address of the subnet that is assigned the
corresponding area ID.
- Subnet
Mask - The netmask of the subnet.
- Area
ID - The OSPF area of the subnet.
- Area
Type - The type of OSPF area.
- Create - Creates
the OSPF area and displays it under Current OSPF Areas.
- Current
OSPF Areas - Displays the OSPF areas. Selecting a check box enables
deletion of the corresponding area.
- Modify - Opens the
Modify OSPF Area page, see Section
11.21.
- Clear
All - Clears all check boxes.
- Select
All - Selects all check boxes.
- Delete - Deletes
the selected routes.
- OSPF
Status - Opens the OSPF General Status page, see Section
11.112.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the installation wizard.
This page is used to modify or delete an OSPF area.

Figure 67 The Modify OSPF Area page
- Net Address - The IP
address of the subnet that is assigned the corresponding area ID.
- Subnet
Mask - The netmask of the subnet.
- Area
ID - The OSPF area of the subnet.
- Area
Type - The type of OSPF area.
- OK -
Updates the OSPF area and returns to the OSPF Area Configuration page,
see Section
11.20.
- Cancel - Closes the
page without modifying the OSPF area and returns to the OSPF Area
Configuration page.
- Delete - Deletes the
OSPF area and returns to the OSPF Area Configuration page.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the installation wizard.
This page is used to configure a PFU1.

Figure 68 The PFU1 Configuration page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the PFU1.
- In
Service - Sets the unit in operating mode.
- Out of
Service - Sets the unit in non-operating mode.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the unit.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure a PFU2.

Figure 69 The PFU2 Configuration page
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the unit.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure a PFU3.

Figure 70 The PFU3 Configuration page
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the unit.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure an FAU.

Figure 71 The FAU Configuration page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the FAU.
- In
Service - Sets the unit in operating mode.
- Out of
Service - Sets the unit in non-operating mode. The unit is regarded as
not present and will not be presented in the Navigation Tree, for
example.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the unit.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.

Figure 72 The NPU1 BA Configuration page
This page is used to configure an NPU1 BA.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the unit and lets through notifications from the unit's
interfaces.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure an NPU1 ANSI.

Figure 73
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the unit and lets through notifications from the unit's
interfaces.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure an NPU2 A.

Figure 74 The NPU2 A Configuration page
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the unit and lets through notifications from the unit's
interfaces.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to select which DS1 interfaces that will be used in the
Ethernet Bridge, implemented in the NPU2 A. A maximum of 16 DS1s can be used for
transmission of Ethernet traffic.

Figure 75
- Units - Displays the
units that contain DS1 interfaces. Select one unit from the list.
- Select - Displays
the available DS1s for the selected unit under Interfaces.
- Interfaces - Displays
DS1s that can be bridged. An DS1 can be bridged if it is not part of a traffic
routing, used for DCN or already bridged. Select the DS1s to be bridged. Hold
down CTRL or SHIFT and click to select multiple items.
- Add
- Moves the selected DS1s to Bridged Interfaces.
- Note:
- Activation of the Ethernet port requires a
license. See Section
6.3 for more information on how to work with
licenses.
- Bridged
Interfaces - Displays the bridged DS1s. If DS1s should be removed from the
bridge, select them in the list. Hold down CTRL or SHIFT and
click to select multiple items.
- Remove - Removes
the selected DS1s from the bridge.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the bridge should send any notifications for the HDLC
encapsulation interface. Only displayed when at least one DS1 is bridged.
- Enable - Select the
check box to enable notifications.
- Reset
- Resets the settings of the check box.
- Apply
- Applies notifications settings without leaving the page.
This page is used to select which DS1 interfaces that will be used in the
Ethernet Bridge, implemented in ETU2.

Figure 76 The Bridge Configuration page for
ETU2
- Units - Displays the
units that contain DS1 interfaces. Select one unit from the list.
- Select - Displays
the available DS1s for the selected unit under Interfaces.
- Interfaces - Displays
DS1s that can be bridged. An DS1 can be bridged if it is not part of a traffic
routing, used for DCN or already bridged. Select the DS1s to be bridged. Hold
down CTRL or SHIFT and click to select multiple items.
- Add
- Moves the selected DS1s to Bridged Interfaces.
- Note:
- One 10/100BASE-T interface is available
without a license. Activating all interfaces requires a license. See Section
6.3 for more information on how to work with
licenses.
- IM Group
Interfaces - Displays the bridged DS1s. If DS1s should be removed from the
bridge, select them in the list. Hold down CTRL or SHIFT and
click to select multiple items.
- Remove - Removes
the selected DS1s from the bridge.
- IM
Group - Specifies settings for the IM Group interface.
- Notifications
Enable - Specifies if notifications should be sent for the IM Group
interface.
- IM
Group Down Enable - Specifies if notifications should be sent for Lower Layer
Down/No
Traffic alarms. Only
available when Notifications Enable is selected.
- IM
Group Degraded Service Enable - Specifies if notifications should be
sent for Degraded Service alarms. Only available when
Notifications Enable is selected.
- IM
Group Threshold - Specifies if notifications should be sent for Degraded
Service/Quality of Service alarms. Only
available when Notifications Enable is selected.
- IM
Group Keep Alive - Specifies if notifications should be sent for Loss of keep alive/Keep
Alive alarms. Only
available when Notifications Enable is selected.
- Error
Threshold High - Specifies the threshold for discarded frames that
indicates bad quality of service on the IM Group interface. This value must
be larger than Error Threshold Low.
- Error
Threshold Low - Specifies the threshold for discarded frames that
indicates acceptable quality of service on the IM Group interface. This
value must be smaller than Error Threshold High.
- Error
Filter Time - Specifies the time period (in seconds) the quality of
service is measured on the IM Group interface. This value must be in the
range 3 to 900 seconds.
- Default
User Priority - Specifies the default user priority on the IM Group
interface for traffic received from the network.
- Bridge - Specifies
settings for the Bridge interface.
- Administrative Status
In Service - Specifies the desired status of the interface.
- Notifications Enable
- Enables notifications from the interface.
- Speed - Specifies
the speed in Mbit/s and duplex mode or detects it automatically.
- MDI-MDIX -
Specifies the MDI mode, that is selection of Rx/Tx.
- Auto - The mode is
detected automatically (default). A crossed or straight cable can be used
independent of the connected device.
- MDI
- Manual mode with Rx and Tx not switched. Use a straight cable to connect
to a router and a crossed cable to a PC.
- MDIX - Manual mode
with Rx and Tx switched. Use a straight cable to connect to a PC and a
crossed cable to a router.
- Flow
Control - Activates or deactivates the flow control mode on bridge
interface.
- Default
User Priority - Specifies the default user priority on bridge interface.
- Auto
Negotiation -- Enable Auto Negotiation of the interface capabilities for
speed and duplex mode.
- Reset
- Resets the settings of the check boxes.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure an ETU2.

Figure 77 The ETU2 Configuration page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the unit.
- In
Service - Sets the unit in operating mode.
- Out of
Service - Sets the unit in non-operating mode.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Selecting Out of Service will disturb the
traffic.
|
- Note:
- Notifications from the unit's interfaces
are suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the unit and lets through notifications from the unit's
interfaces.
- Traffic
Classes - Specifies the settings for traffic classes.
- Number
of traffic classes - Specifies the number of traffic classes.
- Note:
- This setting affects all ETU2 units in the
NE.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure an LTU 12xDS1.

Figure 78 The LTU 12xDS1 Configuration
page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the unit.
- In
Service - Sets the unit in operating mode.
- Out of
Service - Sets the unit in non-operating mode.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Selecting Out of Service will disturb the
traffic.
|
- Note:
- Notifications from the unit's interfaces
are suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the unit and lets through notifications from the unit's
interfaces.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure LTU 16xDS1. Configuration for LTU 16/1 is
similar.

Figure 79 The LTU 16xDS1 Configuration
page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the unit.
- In
Service - Sets the unit in operating mode.
- Out of
Service - Sets the unit in non-operating mode.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Selecting Out of Service will disturb the
traffic.
|
- Note:
- Notifications from the unit's interfaces
are suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the unit and lets through notifications from the unit's
interfaces.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure an LTU 155 ANSI.

Figure 80 The LTU 155 Configuration page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the unit.
- In
Service - Sets the unit in operating mode
- Out of
Service - Sets the unit in non-operating mode.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Selecting Out of Service will disturb the
traffic.
|
- Note:
- Notifications from the unit's interfaces
are suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the unit and lets through notifications from the unit's
interfaces.
- Clock
Source - Selects the clock to be used as transmit clock.
- RxClock - The
recovered receive clock.
- Internal - The
local clock source.
- Physical
Interface - Specifies the SONET connection to be used.
- Electrical -
Electrical interface.
- Optical - Optical
interface.
- Automatic Selection
- Selects the connected interface automatically.
- OC-3/STS-3 Port
Configuration - Specifies the properties of the OC-3/STS-3 port.
- Administrative
Status - Specifies the administrative status of the OC-3/STS-3 port.
- Not
Configured - The port does not provide traffic until it is configured.
- Stand-alone VC-12 -
The port has 81 DS1 interfaces and operates alone.
- MSP
Protection - Opens the Create MSP Protection page for the unit,
see Section
11.70.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure an MMU2.

Figure 81 The MMU2 Configuration page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the unit. For a 1+1 terminal it is possible to
specify the status of all three units.
- In
Service - Sets the unit in operating mode.
- Out of
Service - Sets the unit in non-operating mode.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Selecting Out of Service will disturb the
traffic.
|
- Note:
- Notifications from the unit's interfaces
are suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications. For a 1+1 terminal it is
possible to disable notifications from all three indoor units.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the unit and lets through notifications from the unit's
interfaces.
- Protection Mode -
Specifies the protection mode of the terminal.
- Note:
- Setting the protection mode is not applicable
for ATU (B).
- Not
Defined - Indicates a mismatch regarding how the number of units per
terminal are configured.
- Prepare
for 1+0 configuration - An unprotected Radio Terminal. This is the
default value.
- Note:
- If the terminal has been configured as 1+1,
all three units must be left in the magazine until the terminal is
configured as 1+0.
- Prepare
for 1+1 configuration - A protected Radio Terminal. Only available if
the units are placed in adjacent AMM positions according to specifications
in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation
Manual.
- Terminal
ID - Displays the Radio Terminal identity.
- Traffic
Capacity - The traffic capacity of the MMU2. The default value is 2x2
Mbit/s. Not Defined indicates a mismatch between the
traffic capacities of the two MMU2 units in a 1+1 terminal.
- Warnings - Warnings
about configuration mismatches, such as the number of units per terminal and
the protection mode set in MSM.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- Perform
AM Setup and Hop Setup - Starts MSM for further configuration of the Radio
Terminal.
- Note:
- When using MINI-LINK Manager 7.1, the link
Perform Hop Setup is present instead. Clicking the link starts
MINI-LINK E Adapter. For MINI-LINK Manager 6.1 the link is replaced by the
text "Use MINI-LINK Manager to view the hop".
- Back
- Navigates backward one step in the wizard. Only available in the
installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the wizard. Only available in the installation
wizard.
- How to configure an
unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal, see Section
6.5.3.
- How to
configure a protected (1+1) Radio Terminal, see Section
6.5.4.
This page is used to configure an SMU2 ANSI. The unit can be used for
protection in a protected (1+1) Radio Terminal or as a traffic interface with
co-sited MINI-LINK E terminals.

Figure 82 The SMU2 ANSI Configuration page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the unit. For a 1+1 terminal it is possible to
specify the status of all three units.
- In
Service - Sets the unit in operating mode.
- Out of
Service - Sets the unit in non-operating mode.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Selecting Out of Service will disturb the
traffic.
|
- Note:
- Notifications from the unit's interfaces
are suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications. For a 1+1 terminal it is
possible to disable notifications from all three indoor units.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the unit and lets through notifications from the unit's
interfaces.
- SMU2
Mode - Specifies the working mode of the unit.
- Protection - The
unit is used for protection in a 1+1 Radio Terminal.
- Note:
- The unit must be set in Protection
mode if the embedded software (CSS) in the unit should be updated using
the Local Upgrade software.
- Protection Mode -
Specifies the protection mode of the terminal. Only available when
Protection is selected.
- Not
Defined - Indicates a mismatch regarding how the number of units per
terminal are configured.
- Disabled - An
unprotected Radio Terminal. This is the default value. This option is mainly
used to disable the 1+1 configuration. The SMU2 ANSI has no practical
application when it is set in this mode.
- Note:
- If the terminal has been configured as 1+1,
all three units must be left in the magazine until the terminal is
configured as 1+0.
- Prepare
for 1+1 configuration - A protected Radio Terminal. Only available if
the units are placed in adjacent AMM positions according to specifications
in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation
Manual.
- Terminal
ID - Displays the Radio Terminal identity.
- Traffic
Capacity - Displays or sets the traffic capacity.
- Protection: The traffic
capacity of the MMU2s in the 1+1 terminal. The default value is 2x2 Mbit/s.
Not Defined indicates a mismatch between the traffic
capacities of the two MMU2 units.
- Warnings - Warnings
about configuration mismatches, such as the number of units per terminal and
the protection mode set in MSM.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- Perform
AM Setup and Hop Setup - Starts MSM for further configuration of the Radio
Terminal.
- Note:
- When using MINI-LINK Manager 7.1, the link
Perform Hop Setup is present instead. Clicking the link starts
MINI-LINK E Adapter. For MINI-LINK Manager 6.1 the link is replaced by the
text "Use MINI-LINK Manager to view the hop".
- Back
- Navigates backward one step in the wizard. Only available in the
installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the wizard. Only available in the installation
wizard.
- How to configure a protected
(1+1) Radio Terminal, see Section
6.5.4.
This page is used to configure the MMU2 BA/CAs on the near-end Radio
Terminal. For protected (1+1) Radio Terminals, both modems in the terminal are
configured at the same time.

Figure 83 The MMU2 BA/CA Configuration page showing both
Near and Far End
- Note:
- To show the configuration of the far-end, click
Show Far End.
- ID - Specifies how
identities are handled.
- Near
End - Specifies the identity of this Radio Terminal.
- Far
End - Specifies the expected identity of the Radio Terminal on the other
end of the radio link. If Radio ID Check is enabled, this identity
must match the identity of the far-end terminal.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the Radio Terminal should send any notifications.
- Radio
ID Check - Controls that the received traffic originates from the
correct far-end Radio Terminal; if not, an alarm is generated. Read-only for
far-end terminals.
- Activate Traffic -
Specifies if traffic should be active. Also available for far-end terminals.
By disabling traffic (clearing the check box), it is possible to
configure the radio terminal parameters without having all required
licenses. When enabling traffic, the system checks if there are any missing
licenses. See Section
6.3 for more information on how to work with licenses.
- Traffic
Capacity - Modulation - Specifies the traffic capacity, modulation and
frame format of the Radio Terminal. All supported capacities with its
modulation and frame format are displayed. Unknown
indicates a mismatch between the two MMU2 BA/CA units in a protected Radio
Terminal. Read-only for far-end terminals.
- Note:
- Traffic capacities other than 2x2 Mbit/s
requires a license. See Section
6.3 for more information on how to work with licenses.
- Note:
- Modulation schemes other than C-QPSK requires
a license. See Section
6.3 for more information on how to work with licenses.
- Protection Mode -
Specifies the protection mode of the Radio Terminal. Read-only for far-end
terminals.
- Note:
- Protection modes other than 1+0 requires a
license. See Section
6.3 for more information on how to work with licenses.
- Not
Defined - Indicates a mismatch in a protected Radio Terminal. For
example, it has been configured as 1+1 Hot and then one MMU2 BA/CA is
removed.
- 1+0
- Specifies an unprotected Radio Terminal.
- 1+1 Hot
- Specifies a protected Radio Terminal in hot standby mode. Only
available if there are two units in the correct positions.
- 1+1
Work - Specifies a protected Radio Terminal in working standby mode.
Only available if there are two units in the correct positions.
- Protection Switch
Configuration - Opens the SWITCH Protection page where the
protection is configured. Only available for protected (1+1) Radio
Terminals. Unavailable in the Installation Wizard.
For asymmetric hops, where the near-end side is unprotected (1+0), select
Launch Far End EEM, navigate to the SWITCH Protection page and
configure the protection.
- BER Alarm
Threshold - Specifies the BER alarm threshold. Also available for far-end
terminals.
- Fade
Notification Timer - Notifications for alarms caused by fading, with a
duration less than the specified time (0 - 1000 seconds, default 200 seconds)
are not sent. Only applicable for 1+1 configurations. Not shown for far-end
terminals.
The following alarms are affected:
- Hitless Phase
- Unable To Protect, caused by fading, with a severity
other than Critical.
If the problem persists after the specified time, the alarm notifications
are time stamped and sent.
- Note:
- The timer is disabled if an Unable To Protect alarm with severity Critical already is active or if it occurs within the
specified time.
- MMU
<ID> - Specifies the desired status of the unit.
- In
Service - Selecting the check box sets the unit in operating mode.
Read-only for far-end terminals based on MMU2 BA/CA; not shown for other
far-end terminals.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Clearing the check box will set the unit Out of Service
and disturb the traffic.
|
- Note:
- If the unit is set Out of Service,
notifications from the unit's interfaces are suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications. Not shown for far-end
terminals.
- RAU
<ID> - Clicking the link opens the RAU Configuration page,
see Section
11.39. Not shown in the Installation Wizard or for far-end terminals.
- RAU IF
<ID> - Clicking the link opens the RAU IF Configuration
page, see Section
11.38. Not shown in the Installation Wizard or for far-end
terminals.
- Launch
Far End EEM - Opens a second browser window for the far-end NE. Only
available for far-end terminals based on MINI-LINK TN when there is a working
DCN connection.
- Launch
MSM - Starts MSM for the radio link. Only available for far-end terminals
based on MINI-LINK E.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- Back
- Navigates backward one step in the wizard. Only shown in the Installation
Wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the wizard. Only shown in the Installation
Wizard.
- How to configure an
unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
6.5.1.
- How to
configure a protected (1+1) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
6.5.2.
This page is used to configure an RAU IF interface for an MMU2 BA/CA.

Figure 84 The RAU IF Configuration page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the interface.
- Up
- Sets the interface in operating mode.
- Down - Sends an AIS
instead of traffic on the interface (in both directions). Notifications from
this interface and higher layer interfaces are suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the interface should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the interface and lets through notifications from higher
layer interfaces.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- How to configure an
unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
6.5.1.
- How to
configure a protected (1+1) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
6.5.2.
This page is used to configure the radio units on the near- and far end Radio
Terminal.

Figure 85 The RAU Configuration page showing the
Far-End
- Note:
- To show the configuration of the far-end, click
Show Far End.
- Near/Far End Radio Terminal
<ID> - Displays the identity of the Radio Terminal. Both RAUs are
available in a protected Radio Terminal.
- Administrative
Status - Specifies the desired status of the unit.
- In
Service - Selecting the check box sets the unit in operating mode.
Read-only for far-end terminals based on MMU2 BA/CA; not shown for other
far-end terminals.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Clearing the check box will set the unit Out of
Service and disturb the traffic.
|
- Note:
- If the unit is set Out of Service,
notifications from the unit's interfaces are
suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the unit should send any notifications. Not shown for far-end
terminals.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the unit and lets through notifications from the its
interface.
- MMU2
BA/CA <ID> - Clicking the link opens the MMU2 BA/CA
Configuration page, see Section
11.37. Not shown for far-end terminals.
- RF
<ID> - Clicking the link opens the RF Configuration page,
see Section
11.40. Not shown for far-end terminals.
- RAU
<ID> - Displays the identity of the radio unit. In protected (1+1)
configurations, both radios are shown side-by-side.
- Tx
Frequency Range - Displays the frequency range this RAU supports.
- Tx
Frequency - Specifies the transmitted frequency in MHz. Read-only for
Ra2 in protected (1+1) terminals.
- Rx
Frequency - Indicates the received frequency in MHz, as determined by
the Tx Frequency.
- Transmitter -
Selecting the check box turns the transmitter on. Clearing the check box
turns the transmitter off.
- Tx
Attenuator - Specifies the value (in dB) of an optional fixed RF
attenuator. Not shown for far-end terminals.
- Note:
- This parameter is shown for all types of
radio units, even if fixed RF attenuators only can be fitted to radio
units with RAU1 mechanical design.
If you specify a value for a radio unit that cannot be fitted with an
attenuator (for example RAU2), you may get an error message that the value
is out of range. In this case, all parameters are reset to their initial
values. The Tx Attenuator value is automatically reset to +0
dB.
- Output
Power Mode - Specifies how the output power is controlled.
- RTPC - The output
power is set from a management application.
- ATPC - The output
power is set automatically depending on the received input power in the
far-end RAU.
- Output
Power - Specifies the output power (including Tx Attenuator) in
dBm. Only available when Output Power Mode is set to RTPC.
- Max
Output Power - Specifies the maximum output power (including Tx
Attenuator) in dBm. Only available when Output Power Mode is set
to ATPC.
- Target
Input Power (far-end) - Specifies the target input power (in dBm) for
the far-end RAU. Only available when Output Power Mode is set to
ATPC.
- RF
Input Alarm Threshold - Specifies the input power threshold value (in
dBm) used for 1+1 switching.
- Show ATPC
Capabilities - Shows the ATPC capabilities for all units in the radio
link. Click Hide ATPC Capabilities to hide them again.

- Launch
Far End EEM - Opens a second browser window for the far-end NE. Only
available for far-end terminals based on MINI-LINK TN when there is a working
DCN connection.
- Launch
MSM - Starts MSM for the radio link. Only available for far-end terminals
based on MINI-LINK E.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- Back
- Navigates backward one step in the wizard. Only available in the
installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the wizard. Only available in the installation
wizard.
- How to configure an
unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA or ATU MMU2 B, see Section
6.5.1.
- How to
configure a protected (1+1) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
6.5.2.
This page is used to configure an RF interface, on an RAU connected to an
MMU2 BA/CA or ATU MMU2 B.

Figure 86 The RF Configuration page

Figure 87 The RF Configuration page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the interface.
- Up
- Sets the interface in operating mode.
- Down - Turns the
transmitter off and sends an AIS in the receive direction. Notifications
from this interface and higher layer interfaces are suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the interface should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the interface and lets through notifications from higher
layer interfaces.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- How to configure an
unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA or ATU MMU2 B, see Section
6.5.1.
- How to
configure a protected (1+1) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
6.5.2.
This page is used to reset a Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA to the default
configuration. The configuration items on the MMU2 BA/CA , RAU, RAU IF, RF and
SWITCH configuration pages will get default values. All units in the terminal
must be In Service to be able to perform this
operation.

Figure 88 The Reset Configuration page
|
 |
Caution! |
|
Resetting the configuration will disturb the traffic.
|
- Apply - Applies the
default configuration without leaving the page.
- How to configure an
unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
6.5.1.
- How to
configure a protected (1+1) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
6.5.2.
This page is used, from a near end MMU2 BA/CA, to restore the configuration
of near and far end radio terminals, which means:
- Loops are removed.
- Transmitters
are turned on.
- Switch mode
is set to Auto.
- Notifications for the
terminal are enabled.
All units in the terminal must be In Service to be
able to perform this operation.

Figure 89 The Restore Configuration page
- Restore Near/Far End -
Restores the configuration without leaving this page.
- How to configure an
unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA or ATU MMU2 B, see Section
6.5.1.
- How to
configure a protected (1+1) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
6.5.2.
This page is used to configure the SWITCH interface for a Radio Terminal with
MMU2 BA or MMU2 CA.

Figure 90 The SWITCH Configuration page
- Notifications -
Specifies if the interface should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the interface and lets through notifications from higher
layer interfaces.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- How to configure an
unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
6.5.1.
- How to
configure a protected (1+1) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
6.5.2.
This page is used to configure the protection parameters for a near-end radio
terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, and to configure some parameters for a far-end radio
terminal.

Figure 91 The SWITCH Protection page
- Note:
- To show the configuration of the far-end, click
Show Far End.
- Units - Shows the MMUs
in the protected Radio Terminal.
- Modem
Unit - Shows the names of the two MMUs.
- Active
MMU - Selects which MMU is used. Read-only for far-end terminals based
on MMU2 BA/CA; not shown for other far-end terminals.
- Active
Tx Radio - Selects the transmitting RAU in a 1+1 Hot configuration.
- Active
Rx Radio - Selects the receiving RAU in a 1+1 Hot configuration.
- Preferred Tx Radio
(currently not used) - Selects the preferred RAU for transmitting in a 1+1
Hot configuration.
- Preferred Rx Radio
(currently not used) - Selects the preferred RAU for receiving in a 1+1 Hot
configuration.
- Switch
Mode - Specifies the switch mode for a protected Radio Terminal.
- Auto - Specifies
automatic switching. When Switch Mode is Auto, the Active
MMU option is unavailable.
- Manual - Specifies
manual switching.
- Launch
MSM - Starts MSM for the radio link. Only available for far-end terminals
based on MINI-LINK E.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values. Not shown for far-end
terminals.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page. Not shown for
far-end terminals.
- Back
- Navigates backward one step in the wizard. Only available in the
installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the wizard. Only available in the installation
wizard.
- How to configure an
unprotected (1+0) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
6.5.1.
- How to
configure a protected (1+1) Radio Terminal with MMU2 BA/CA, see Section
6.5.2.
This page is used to configure an Line/Section interface.

Figure 92 The Line/Section Configuration
page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the interface.
- Up
- Sets the interface in operating mode.
- Down - Sends an AIS
instead of traffic on the interface (in both directions). Notifications from
this interface and higher layer interfaces are suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the interface should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the interface and lets through notifications from higher
layer interfaces.
- Trail
Trace Identifier - Specifies the identifier of the transmitted/received
payload.
- Transmitted -
Specifies the identifier of the transmitted payload. Up to 15 characters (A
- Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and white space) are allowed.
- Received - Displays
the identifier of the received payload.
- Expected -
Specifies the expected identifier of the received payload. Up to 15
characters (A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and white space) are allowed. If an
identifier is specified, a comparison between the received and expected
identifiers is done. If not equal, a Trail trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM)
defect is generated.
- Performance -
Specifies if performance data should be displayed and support of MS-REI.
- Enable
Line PM View - Selecting the check box enables display of MS performance
data on the Line/Section Performance page, see Section
11.149.
- Enable
Section PM View - Selecting the check box enables display of RS
performance data on the Line/Section Performance page, see Section
11.149.
- Ena ble
Line-REI Support - Clearing the check box secures compatibility with
older SONET equipment which does not support LINE-REI.
- Degraded
Threshold - Specifies how DEGTHR and DEGM should be used.
- DEGTHR
Threshold - Specifies the DEGTHR threshold value used to detect a
degraded defect at MS. Errored blocks are counted every second. A second is
declared as degraded if the number of errored blocks during that second
reaches or exceeds the threshold value. Value range is 1 - 100.
Default value is 15.
- DEGM
Monitoring Period - Specifies the monitoring period, DEGM, used to
declare DEG. DEG is declared as degraded if consecutive degraded seconds
appear during a complete monitoring period. DEG is cleared if consecutive
non-degraded seconds appear during a complete monitoring period. Value range
is 2 - 10. Default value is 3.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure an MSP interface.

Figure 93 The APS Configuration page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the interface.
- Up
- Sets the interface in operating mode.
- Down - Sends an AIS
instead of traffic on the interface (in both directions). Notifications from
this interface and higher layer interfaces are suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the interface should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the interface and lets through notifications from higher
layer interfaces.
- Performance -
Specifies if performance data should be displayed.
- Enable
PM View - Selecting the check box enables display of performance data
for this APS interface on the MSP Performance page, see Section
11.151.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure a STS-1 interface.

Figure 94 The STS-1 Configuration page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the interface.
- Up
- Sets the interface in operating mode.
- Down - Sends an AIS
instead of traffic on the interface (in both directions). Notifications from
this interface and higher layer interfaces are suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the interface should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the interface and lets through notifications from higher
layer interfaces.
- Trail
Trace Identifier - Specifies the identifier of the transmitted/received
payload.
- Transmitted -
Specifies the identifier of the transmitted payload. Up to 15 characters (A
- Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and white space) are allowed.
- Received - Displays
the identifier of the received payload.
- Expected -
Specifies the expected identifier of the received payload. Up to 15
characters (A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and white space) are allowed. If an
identifier is specified, a comparison between the received and expected
identifiers will be done. If not equal, a Trail trace Identifier Mismatch
(TIM) defect is generated.
- Performance -
Specifies if performance data should be displayed.
- Enable
PM View - Selecting the check box enables display of performance data
for thisSTS-1 interface on the VC-4 Performance page, see Section
11.153.
- Degraded
Threshold - Specifies how DEGTHR and DEGM should be used.
- DEGTHR
Threshold - Specifies the DEGTHR threshold value used to detect a
degraded defect at STS-1. Errored blocks are counted every second. A second
is declared as degraded if the number of errored blocks during that second
reaches or exceeds the threshold value. Value range is 1 - 100.
Default value is 30.
- DEGM
Monitoring Period - Specifies the monitoring period, DEGM, used to
declare DEG. DEG is declared as degraded if consecutive degraded seconds
appear during a complete monitoring period. DEG is cleared if consecutive
non-degraded seconds appear during a complete monitoring period. Value range
is 2 - 10. Default value is 3.
- DEGTHR
and DEGM configuration for all VT1.5 - Opens the All VC-12
Configuration page, where the DEGTHR and DEGM thresholds for all VT1.5
interfaces on the unit are configured, see Section
11.49.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure a VT1.5 interface.

Figure 95 The VT1.5 Configuration page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the interface.
- Up
- Sets the interface in operating mode.
- Down - Sends an AIS
instead of traffic on the interface (in both directions). Notifications from
this interface and higher layer interfaces are suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the interface should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the interface and lets through notifications from higher
layer interfaces.
- Trail
Trace Identifier - Specifies the identifier of the transmitted/received
payload.
- Transmitted -
Specifies the identifier of the transmitted payload. Up to 15 characters (A
- Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and white space) are allowed.
- Received - Displays
the identifier of the received payload.
- Expected -
Specifies the expected identifier of the received payload. Up to 15
characters (A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and white space) are allowed. If an
identifier is specified, a comparison between the received and expected
identifiers will be done. If not equal, a Trail trace Identifier Mismatch
(TIM) defect is generated.
- Performance -
Specifies if performance data should be displayed.
- Enable
PM View - Selecting the check box enables display of performance data
for this VT1.5 interface on the VT1.5 Performance page, see Section
11.155.
- Degraded
Threshold - Provides a link for specification of how DEGTHR and DEGM
should be used for all VT1.5 interfaces on the unit.
- DEGTHR
and DEGM configuration - Opens the All VC-12 Configuration page,
where the DEGTHR and DEGM thresholds for all VT1.5 interfaces on the unit
are configured, see Section
11.49.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure all VT1.5 interfaces simultaneously on an
LTU 155 ANSI. One or several parameters can be included in the
configuration.

Figure 96 The All VT1.5 Configuration page
The page initially displays no parameter values but it is possible to use one
of the interfaces as template. If this page is opened by clicking the DEGTHR
and DEGM configuration link on the configuration page for an individual
VC-12 interface, the values for the interface are displayed as default values
with Set selected.
- Template Interface -
Specifies the VC-12 interface to be used as template. Select an interface from
the list and click Select to display its configuration. If no interface
is selected no values are displayed.
- Set -
Specifies if a specific parameter should be set for all VC-12 interfaces on
the unit. Available for all parameters on the page.
- Administrative Status
- Specifies the desired status of the interface.
- Up
- Sets the interface in operating mode.
- Down - Sends an AIS
instead of traffic on the interface (in both directions). Notifications from
this interface and higher layer interfaces are suppressed.
- Notifications -
Specifies if the interface should send any notifications.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the interface and lets through notifications from higher
layer interfaces.
- Trail
Trace Identifier - Specifies the identifier of the transmitted/received
payload.
- Transmitted -
Specifies the identifier of the transmitted payload. Up to 15 characters (A
- Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and white space) are allowed.
- Received - Displays
the identifier of the received payload.
- Expected -
Specifies the expected identifier of the received payload. Up to 15
characters (A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and white space) are allowed. If an
identifier is specified, a comparison between the received and expected
identifiers will be done. If not equal, a Trail trace Identifier Mismatch
(TIM) defect is generated.
- Performance -
Specifies if performance data should be displayed.
- Enable
PM View - Selecting the check box enables display of performance data
for all VC-12 interfaces on the VC-12 Performance page, see Section
11.155.
- Degraded
Threshold - Specifies how DEGTHR and DEGM should be used.
- DEGTHR
Threshold - Specifies the DEGTHR threshold value used to detect a
degraded defect at VC-4. Errored blocks are counted every second. A second
is declared as degraded if the number of errored blocks during that second
reaches or exceeds the threshold value. Value range is 1 - 100.
Default value is 30.
- DEGM
Monitoring Period - Specifies the monitoring period, DEGM, used to
declare DEG. DEG is declared as degraded if consecutive degraded seconds
appear during a complete monitoring period. DEG is cleared if consecutive
non-degraded seconds appear during a complete monitoring period. Value range
is 2 - 10. Default value is 3.
- Clear
All - Clears all Set check boxes.
- Set
All - Selects all Set check boxes.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Opens a confirmation dialog box, where all configurations can be confirmed
and applied.
This page is used to configure an MUX23 interface.

Figure 97 The MUX23 Configuration page
- Notifications -
Specifies notifications for the interface.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the interface and lets through notifications from higher
layer interfaces.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure an MUX12 interface.

Figure 98 The E2 Configuration page
- Notifications -
Specifies notifications for the interface.
- Enable - Enables
notifications from the interface and lets through notifications from higher
layer interfaces.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure an DS1 interface.

Figure 99 The DS1 Configuration page
- Administrative Status -
Specifies the desired status of the interface.
- Up
- Sets the interface in operating mode.
- Down - Sends an AIS
instead of traffic on the interface (in both directions) and suppresses
notifications.
- Performance -
Specifies if performance data should be displayed.
- Enable
PM View - Selecting the check box enables display of performance data
for this DS1 interface on the DS1 Performance page, see Section
11.157.
- Squelch -- Indicates
if squelch is enabled.
- Alarms
and Notifications - Specifies alarms and notifications for the interface.
- Enable
AIS Detection - Enables the detection of AIS for the interface.
- Note:
- Its not possible to disable AIS Detection
for protected interfaces (1+1 E1 SNCP).
- Enable
Notifications - Enables notifications from the interface.
- Enable
AIS Notifications - Enables AIS notifications from the interface. Only
available when Enable Notifications is selected.
- Enable
LOS Notifications - Enables LOS notifications from the interface. Only
available when Enable Notifications is selected.
- Enable
LOF Notifications - Enables LOF notifications from the interface. Only
available when Enable Notifications is selected.
- Enable
LOMF Notifications - Enables LOMF notifications from the interface. Only
available when Enable Notifications is selected.
- Enable
RAI Notifications - Enables RAI notifications from the interface. Only
available when Enable Notifications is selected.
- Enable
UAS Notifications - Enables UAS notifications from the interface. Only
available when Enable Notifications is selected.
- Framing - Shows the
framing format used.
- Clock
Source - Shows the clock source.
- Configure
Protected Interface - Opens the DS1 Configuration page for the
protected interface. Only available for a protected interface.
- Configure
Unprotected Interface - Opens the DS1 Configuration page for the
unprotected interface. Only available for a protected interface.
- Back
- Returns to the page previously displayed. Only available if you reached this
page from the Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- DS1
Overview - Opens the DS1 Overview page in a separate window, see Section
11.54.
This page is used to configure all physical DS1 interfaces simultaneously, on
a unit. One or several parameters can be included in the configuration by
selecting the Set check box.

Figure 100 The All DS1 Configuration page
The page initially displays no parameter values but it is possible to use one
of the interfaces as template.
- Template Interface -
Specifies the DS1 interface to be used as template. Select an interface from
the list and click Select to display its configuration. If no interface
is selected no values are displayed.
- Set -
Specifies if a specific parameter should be set for all DS1 interfaces on the
unit. Available for all parameters on the page.
- Administrative Status
- Specifies the desired status of the interface.
- Up
- Sets the interface in operating mode.
- Down - Sends an AIS
instead of traffic on the interface (in both directions). Suppresses
notifications from the unit's interfaces.
- Performance -
Specifies if performance data should be displayed.
- Enable
PM View - Selecting the check box enables display of performance data
for all DS1 interfaces on the DS1 Performance page, see Section
11.157.
- Squelch -- Indicates
if squelch is enabled.
- Line
Coding -- Choose line coding. B8ZS or AMI.
- Alarms
and Notifications - Specifies alarms and notifications for the interface.
- Enable
AIS Detection - Enables the detection of AIS for the interface.
- Note:
- Its not possible to disable AIS Detection
for protected interfaces (1+1 E1 SNCP).
- Enable
Notifications - Enables notifications from the interface.
- Enable
AIS Notifications - Enables AIS notifications from the interface.
- Enable
LOS Notifications - Enables LOS notifications from the interface.
- Enable
LOF Notifications - Enables LOF notifications from the interface.
- Enable
LOMF Notifications - Enables LOMF notifications from the interface.
- Enable
RAI Notifications - Enables RAI notifications from the interface.
- Enable
UAS Notifications - Enables UAS notifications from the
interface.
- Line
Length -- Choose line length, 0-133, 134-266, 267-399, 400-533 or 533-655
feet.
- Clear
All - Clears all Set check boxes.
- Set
All - Selects all Set check boxes.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Opens a confirmation dialog box, where all configurations can be confirmed
and applied.
This page is opened in a separate window where you can view and change the
configuration of an DS1 interface, as well as handle its 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection
and traffic routing. Furthermore, it is possible to handle the DS1 as part of
the Ethernet Bridge, when working with an ETU2, or an NE based on NPU2 A, or a
G.804 as part of an IMA Group.
The upper part of the page displays the configuration of the related DS1s.
The top row is the DS1 for which the page is opened. If this DS1 is protected
then the other two DS1s in the 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection is displayed in the next
two rows. If the DS1 is routed then the DS1(s) to which it is routed is also
displayed in the table.
The lower part gives a graphical view of how the different DS1s are
related.

Figure 101
- DS1 <ID> Overview
- Displays for which DS1 this page is opened.
- Help
- Opens the Help section for this page.
- DS1
<ID> - Clicking the link opens the DS1 Configuration page for
the interface, see Section
11.52.
- Admin.
Status - Displays the desired status of the interface.
- PM
View - Displays if performance data should be displayed for the interface
on the DS1 Performance page, see Section
11.157.
- AIS
Detection - Displays if AIS should be detected for the interface.
- Notifications -
Displays if alarm notifications are sent for the interface.
- AIS
Notif. - Displays if AIS notifications are sent for the interface.
- LOS
Notif. - Displays if LOS notifications are sent for the interface.
- LOF
Notif. - Displays if LOF notifications are sent for the interface.
- LOMF
Notif. - Displays if LOMF notifications are sent for the interface.
- RAI
Notif. - Displays if RAI notifications are sent for the interface.
- UAS
Notif. - Displays if UAS notifications are sent for the interface.
- Framing -- Current
framing or N/A.
- Clock
Source -- Current clock source or N/A.
- Create 1+1 DS1 SNCP
(left) - Displayed when an DS1 is unprotected. Clicking the link opens the
1+1 DS1 SNCP List View page where the DS1 can be protected.
- SCNP
(left) - This symbol is displayed when an DS1 is protected. The two
unprotected DS1s are displayed to the left and the protected to the right. The
symbol also illustrates the currently active DS1. The DS1 in bold typeface is
the one for which the page is opened.
The switch mode is stated as Automatic or Manual including Hold-Off time in
seconds.
Clicking the symbol opens the Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page where the
protection can be modified or deleted.
- Create
Traffic Routing - Displayed when an DS1 is not routed and opens the
Traffic Routing List View page where the DS1 can be routed. .
- Traffic
Routing - This symbol is displayed when an DS1 is routed, showing to which
DS1 it is routed and the name of the traffic routing stated below. Clicking
the symbol opens the Modify Traffic Routing page where the traffic
routing can be modified or deleted.
- Add DS1
to Ethernet Bridge - Clicking the link opens the Ethernet Bridge
Configuration page where the DS1 can be added to the Ethernet Bridge. The
page is opened with this interface preselected, see Section
11.29. Only available for an NPU2 A.
- Ethernet
Bridge - This symbol is displayed when an DS1 is added to the Ethernet
Bridge. Clicking the symbol opens the Ethernet Bridge Configuration
page where the DS1 can be removed from the Ethernet Bridge. Only available for
an ETU2, NPU2 A.
- Create
1+1 DS1 SNCP (right) - Clicking the link opens the 1+1 DS1 SNCP List
View page where the DS1 to the right of the Traffic Routing symbol can be
protected. The page is opened with this interface preselected, see Section
11.66.
- SCNP
(right) - This symbol is displayed when the DS1 to the right of the
Traffic Routing symbol is protected. The two unprotected DS1s are displayed to
the right and the protected to the left. The symbol also illustrates the
currently active interface.
The switch mode is stated as Automatic or Manual including Hold-Off time in
seconds.
Clicking the symbol opens the Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page where the
protection can be modified or deleted, see Section
11.69.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
- Close
- Closes the DS1 Overview page.
This page is used to configure a User Input port.

Figure 102 The User Input Configuration
page
- Input Disable - The
port is not used.
- Input
Enable - The port is used.
- Note:
- User Input requires a
license. See Section
6.3 for more information on how to work with licenses.
- Normally Open - The
normal state of the port is open (active low).
- Normally Closed -
The normal state of the port is closed (active high).
- Probable Cause -
Specifies a probable cause of the alarm. The probable cause can be an
environmental alarm or indeterminate.
- Severity -
Specifies the alarm severity. See also Section
7.2.4.
- Specific Problem -
Specifies a detailed description of the alarm. Maximum 80 characters are
allowed.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to configure a User Output port.

Figure 103 The User Output Configuration
page
- Output Disable - The
port is not used.
- Output
Enable - The port is used.
- Note:
- User Output requires a
license. See Section
6.3 for more information on how to work with licenses.
- Description - A
name of the port that indicates its purpose. Maximum 16 characters are
allowed.
- Operator Controlled
- The port is controlled on request from an operator.
- Active - Sets the
port in active (not normal) state.
- Inactive - Sets the
port in inactive (normal) state.
- Alarm
Severity Controlled - The port is automatically set in active (not
normal) state, triggered by one or several alarm severities.
- Cleared/Critical/Major/Minor/Warning
- The severity or severities which set the port in active
state.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to select interfaces for creation or modification of
traffic routing. Based on the selection, the actual configuration is made from
either of two separate pages with different views.

Figure 104 The Traffic Routing Select Interfaces
page
- Interface Type - The
available interface types.
- Note:
- This version of EEM allows only selection of
DS1.
- Select - Submits the
selected interface type.
- Select
units for interface views - Select the units from the two lists that hold
the interfaces to be included in the traffic routing. Unit 1 and Unit 2 can be
the same unit.
- Matrix
View - Opens the Traffic Routing Matrix View page, displaying the
selected interfaces in a matrix, see Section
11.58.
- Note:
- It is not possible to display use Matrix View
for All Units since each axis in the matrix can only show one
unit.
- List
View - Opens the Traffic Routing List View page, displaying the
selected interfaces in a list, see Section
11.59.
- TDM
Status - Information about the TDM busses used for traffic routing. Fault
tolerance is realized by a redundant TDM bus architecture where three busses
provide a switching capacity of two busses. The third bus can be used for
switching if one of the other busses fails.
- Bus
Status - Possible values are: protected, not protected and failure.
- Sync
Status - Possible values are: protected, not protected and failure.
- Bus
Capacity - A value in percent indicating how much of the available TDM
bus capacity that is currently used.
- Show ALL
Current Routings - Opens the Traffic Routing - Current Traffic
Routings page, where all current traffic routings are shown.
- How to create traffic routing
of DS1 interfaces using the Matrix View, see Section
6.9.1.1.
- How to
create traffic routing of DS1 interfaces using the List View, see Section
6.9.1.2.
This page is used to display, create, modify or delete traffic routing. It
contains a matrix with the interfaces on two axes. An intersection point between
two interfaces in the matrix is used to handle a certain traffic routing.
- Note:
- If MINI-LINK Connexion is used to provision
end-to-end DS1 connections, then only use the EEM to view current connections. Creating, modifying, and deleting
DS1 connections shall in this case be done with MINI-LINK
Connexion.
- Note:
- Remote traffic routing requires a license. To
use traffic routing without a license, you need to connect directly to the
O&M/USB port on the NPU. See Section
6.3 for more information on how to work with licenses.

Figure 105 The Traffic Routing Matrix View
page
- Note:
- The interfaces on an MMU2 in a protected (1+1)
Radio Terminal are denoted in accordance with the SMU2 ANSI.
- DS1 Interface -
Displays the selected units.
- X-axis
unit - The name of the unit on the X-axis.
- Y-axis
unit - The name of the unit on the Y-axis.
- Interface
Matrix - Each column and row in the matrix is labelled with an interface
name. If the interface is included in a traffic routing and/or a 1+1 DS1 SNCP
protection the interface name is a link to the DS1 Overview page page,
see Section
11.54. An intersection point in the matrix has a different appearance
depending on the current status of the interface pair.
- List
View - Opens the Traffic Routing List View page for the selected
interfaces, see Section
11.59.
- Select
Interfaces - Opens the Traffic Routing Select Interfaces page, see
Section
11.57.
- How to create traffic routing
of DS1 interfaces using the Matrix View, see Section
6.9.1.1.
This page is used to display, create, modify or delete traffic routing.
- Note:
- If MINI-LINK Connexion is used to provision
end-to-end DS1 connections, then only use the EEM to view current connections. Creating, modifying, and deleting
DS1 connections shall in this case be done with MINI-LINK
Connexion.
- Note:
- Remote traffic routing requires a license. To
use traffic routing without a license, you need to connect directly to the
O&M/USB port on the NPU. See Section
6.3 for more information on how to work with licenses.

Figure 106
- Note:
- The interfaces on an MMU2 in a protected (1+1)
Radio Terminal are denoted in accordance with the SMU2 ANSI.
- <Unit 1> - The
name of the selected unit or All Units is displayed above the left list.
- <Unit
2> - The name of the selected unit or All Units is displayed above the
right list.
- Create - Opens the
Create Traffic Routing or Create Multiple Traffic Routing pages
depending on the number of selected items, see Section
11.61 and Section
11.62.
- Matrix
View - Opens the Traffic Routing Matrix View page, see Section
11.58.
- Select
Interfaces - Opens the Traffic Routing Select Interfaces page,
where interface type and units are selected, see Section
11.57.
- Show
Current Routings - Displays the Current Traffic Routings list
below.
- Current
Traffic Routings - All existing traffic routings that involve the items in
the lists. Clicking the link in a column header sorts the list according to
the items in that column and removes the link in the header.
- Interface 1 - The
name of interface 1.
- Interface 2 - The
name of interface 2.
- Name - The name of
the traffic routing.
- Modify - Opens the
Modify Traffic Routing page, where the traffic routing can be
modified or deleted, see Section
11.63.
- Clear
All - Clears all check boxes.
- Select
All - Selects all check boxes.
- Delete - Deletes the
selected traffic routings.
- Back
- Returns to the Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page, see Section
11.69. Only available when this page is reached from the Modify 1+1 DS1
SNCP page.
- How to create traffic routing
of DS1 interfaces using the List View, see Section
6.9.1.2.
This page shows all current traffic routings.

Figure 107 The Current Traffic Routings
page
- Current Traffic
Routings - All existing traffic routings. Clicking the link in a column
header sorts the list according to the items in that column and removes the
link in the header.
- Interface 1 - The
name of interface 1.
- Interface 2 - The
name of interface 2.
- Name - The name of
the traffic routing.
- Modify - Opens the
Modify Traffic Routing page, where the traffic routing can be
modified or deleted, see Section
11.63.
- Clear
All - Clears all check boxes.
- Select
All - Selects all check boxes.
- Delete - Deletes
the selected traffic routings.
- Select
Interfaces - Opens the Traffic Routing Select Interfaces page, see
Section
11.57.
This page is used to create traffic routing for one interface pair.
- Note:
- If MINI-LINK Connexion is used to provision
end-to-end DS1 connections, then only use the EEM to view current connections. Creating, modifying, and deleting
DS1 connections shall in this case be done with MINI-LINK
Connexion.

Figure 108
- Interfaces - The
interfaces in the traffic routing.
- Name
- The name of the traffic routing.
- OK -
Creates the traffic routing and returns to the Traffic Routing List
View page, see Section
11.59.
- Apply
- Creates the traffic routing without leaving the page. Only available when
this page is opened from the DS1 Overview page.
- Cancel - Closes the
page without creating any traffic routing and returns to the Traffic
Routing List View page, see Section
11.59.
- How to create traffic routing
of DS1 interfaces using the List View, see Section
6.9.2.2.
This page is used to create traffic routing for several interface pairs
simultaneously.
- Note:
- If MINI-LINK Connexion is used to provision
end-to-end DS1 connections, then only use the EEM to view current connections. Creating, modifying, and deleting
DS1 connections shall in this case be done with MINI-LINK
Connexion.

Figure 109 The Create Multiple Traffic Routings
page
- Interface Pairs - The
interface pairs in the traffic routings.
- Name
- Specifies a common name for all traffic routings. An individual name can be
set later by modifying an existing traffic routing.
- OK -
Creates the traffic routings and returns to the Traffic Routing List
View page, see Section
11.59.
- Cancel - Closes the
page without creating any traffic routings and returns to the Traffic
Routing List View page, see Section
11.59.
- How to create traffic routing
of DS1 interfaces using the List View, see Section
6.9.1.2.
This page is used to modify or delete an existing traffic routing.
- Note:
- If MINI-LINK Connexion is used to provision
end-to-end DS1 connections, then only use the EEM to view current connections. Creating, modifying, and deleting
DS1 connections shall in this case be done with MINI-LINK
Connexion.

Figure 110 The Modify Traffic Routing page
- Interfaces - The
interfaces in the traffic routing.
- Name
- Specifies the name of the traffic routing.
- OK -
Updates the traffic routing and returns to the page where this page was
opened.
- Apply
- Modifies the traffic routing without leaving the page. Only available when
this page is opened from the DS1 Overview page.
- Cancel - Closes the
page without modifying the traffic routing and returns to the page where this
page was opened.
- Delete - Deletes the
traffic routing and returns to the page where this page was opened.
- How to modify or delete
traffic routing of DS1 interfaces using the Matrix View, see Section
6.9.2.1.
- How to
modify or delete traffic routing of DS1 interfaces using the List View, see Section
6.9.2.2.
This page is used to select interfaces for creation or modification of 1+1
DS1 SNCP protection. Based on the selection, the actual configuration is made
from either of two separate pages with different views.

Figure 111 The 1+1 DS1 SNCP Select Interfaces
page
- Interface Type - The
available interface type.
- Note:
- This version of EEM allows only selection of
DS1.
- Select - Submits the
selected interface type.
- Select
units for interface views: - Select the units from the two lists that hold
the interfaces to be included in the protection(s). Unit 1 and Unit 2 can be
the same unit.
- Matrix
View - Opens the 1+1 DS1 SNCP Matrix View page, displaying the
selected interfaces in a matrix, see Section
11.65.
- Note:
- It is not possible to display a Matrix View
if All Units is selected since each axis in the matrix can only show one
unit.
- List
View - Opens the 1+1 DS1 SNCP List View page, displaying the
selected interfaces in a list, see Section
11.66.
- How to create 1+1 DS1 SNCP
protection for DS1 interfaces using the Matrix View, see Section
6.7.1.1.
- How to
create 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection for DS1 interfaces using the List View, see Section
6.7.1.2.
This page is used to display, create, modify or delete 1+1 DS1 SNCP
protection. It contains a matrix with the interfaces of the two selected units.
An intersection point between two interfaces in the matrix is used to handle a
certain protection.
- Note:
- If MINI-LINK Connexion is used to provision
end-to-end DS1 connections, then only use the EEM to view current connections. Creating, modifying, and deleting
DS1 connections shall in this case be done with MINI-LINK
Connexion.
- Note:
- 1+1 SNCP protection requires a license. See Section
6.3 for more information on how to work with licenses.

Figure 112 The 1+1 DS1 SNCP Matrix View
page
- Note:
- The interfaces on an MMU2 in a protected (1+1)
Radio Terminal are denoted in accordance with the SMU2 ANSI.
- DS1 Interface -
Displays the names of the selected units.
- X-axis
unit - The name of the unit on the X-axis.
- Y-axis
unit - The name of the unit on the Y-axis.
- Interface
Matrix - Each column and row in the matrix is labelled with an interface
name. If the interface is included in a traffic routing and/or a 1+1 DS1 SNCP
protection the interface name is a link to the DS1 Overview page, see
Section
11.54. An intersection point in the matrix has different appearance
depending on the current status of the of the interface pair.
- Blank
button
- No 1+1 DS1 SNCP
protection exists but it is possible to create one with default settings by
clicking the button.
- P
button
- There is an existing
1+1 DS1 SNCP protection. Clicking the button opens the Modify 1+1 DS1
SNCP page, where the settings for the protection can be changed, see Section
11.69.
- Blank
space - It is not possible to create a 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection. A blank
row or column indicates that the interface is protected with an interface
not visible on the page. To see the interface, click the link on the
interface name on the axis.
A blank space can also indicate that both interfaces are traffic routed.
Then it is not possible to use them in the same 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection.
If the same unit is selected for both the X-axis and the Y-axis all
intersection points representing the same interface on both axes are blank,
since an interface cannot be protected with itself.
- Horizontal line -
The interface labelling the row is protected with an interface on the X-axis
unit. The line ends at a P button in the column labelled by the other
interface.
- Vertical line - The
interface labelling the column is protected with an interface on the Y-axis
unit. The line ends at a P button on the row labelled by the other
interface.
- Interface interval
link
- Controls
the displayed interface interval on the axis. The currently active interval
is highlighted with bold text. Only available if the unit on an axis has
more interfaces than will fit in the page.
- List
View - Opens the 1+1 DS1 SNCP List View page for the selected
units, see Section
11.66.
- Select
Interfaces - Opens the 1+1 DS1 SNCP Select Interfaces page, see Section
11.64.
- How to create 1+1 DS1 SNCP
protection for DS1 interfaces using the Matrix View, see Section
6.7.1.1.
This page is used to display, create, modify or delete 1+1 DS1 SNCP
protection.
- Note:
- If MINI-LINK Connexion is used to provision
end-to-end DS1 connections, then only use the EEM to view current connections. Creating, modifying, and deleting
DS1 connections shall in this case be done with MINI-LINK
Connexion.
- Note:
- 1+1 SNCP protection requires a license. See Section
6.3 for more information on how to work with licenses.

Figure 113 The 1+1 DS1 SNCP List View page
- Note:
- The interfaces on an MMU2 in a protected (1+1)
Radio Terminal are denoted in accordance with the SMU2 ANSI.
- <Unit 1> - The
name of the selected unit or All Units is displayed above the left list.
- Interface 1 -
Displays the available interfaces. Select one or multiple items in the list.
When selecting multiple items, the topmost selected interfaces in the two
lists will form one interface pair and so on. Use CTRL or SHIFT to select
multiple items.
- <Unit
2> - The name of the selected unit or All Units is displayed above the
right list.
- Interface 2 -
Displays the available interfaces. Select one or multiple items in the list.
Use CTRL or SHIFT to select multiple items.
- Create - Opens the
Create 1+1 DS1 SNCP or Create Multiple 1+1 DS1 SNCP pages
depending on the number of selected items, see Section
11.67 and Section
11.68.
- Matrix
View - Opens the 1+1 DS1 SNCP Matrix View page, see Section
11.65.
- Select
Interfaces - Opens the 1+1 DS1 SNCP Select Interfaces page, see Section
11.64.
- Show
Current Protections - Displays the Current Protections list below.
- Current
Protections - All existing protections that involve the interfaces in the
lists. Clicking the link in a column header sorts the list according to the
items in that column and removes the link in the header.
- Interface 1 - The
name of interface 1.
- Interface 2 - The
name of interface 2.
- Switch
Mode - Specifies the way the traffic is switched between the interfaces.
- Automatic - The
traffic is automatically switched between the interfaces if a disturbance
occurs.
- Manual - An
operator has to switch interfaces manually.
- Hold-Off Time - The
time in seconds before an interface switch is initiated.
- Active
Interface - The name of the currently active interface.
- Switch
Count - The number of switches since the last restart.
- Protection Status -
The status of the protection.
- Fully
Protected - Both interfaces are operating.
- Unprotected - The
active interface is operating but the passive interface fails.
- Complete Fail -
Both interfaces fail.
- Lock To
Fail - The active interface fails but the passive is operating and the
switch is locked to the active interface.
- Interface Mismatch
- The interfaces on both sides of the network connection are incompatible.
This status is set only when this can be detected.
- Modify - Opens the
Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page, where the protection can be modified or
deleted, see Section
11.69.
- Clear
All - Clears all check boxes.
- Select
All - Selects all check boxes.
- Delete - Deletes the
selected traffic routings.
- How to create 1+1 DS1 SNCP
protection for DS1 interfaces using the List View, see Section
6.7.1.2.
This page is used to create 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection for one interface
pair.
- Note:
- If MINI-LINK Connexion is used to provision
end-to-end DS1 connections, then only use the EEM to view current connections. Creating, modifying, and deleting
DS1 connections shall in this case be done with MINI-LINK
Connexion.

Figure 114 The Create 1+1 DS1 SNCP page
- Interfaces - Specifies
the interfaces in the protection.
- Type - The type or
role of the interface in the protection.
- DS1
1 - One of the interfaces selected for the protection.
- DS1
2 - The other interface selected for the protection.
- Protected DS1 - The
resulting "virtual" protected interface.
- Name - The name of
the interface.
- Note:
- An asterisk (*) at the end of the name
indicates a protected interface.
- Active - The
interface to carry traffic.
- Severity - The
alarm severity of the interface. See also Section
7.2.4.
- Settings - Specifies
parameters for the protection.
- Hold-Off Time - The
time in seconds before an interface switch is initiated. Value range is
0.0 - 10.0.
- Switch
Mode - Specifies the way the traffic is switched between the interfaces.
- Automatic - The
traffic is automatically switched between the interfaces if a disturbance
occurs.
- Manual - An
operator has to switch interfaces manually using the Modify 1+1 DS1
SNCP page, see Section
11.69.
- OK -
Creates the protection and returns to the 1+1 DS1 SNCP List View page,
see Section
11.66.
- Apply
- Creates the protection without leaving the page. Only available when this
page is opened from the DS1 Overview page.
- Cancel - Closes the
page without creating any protection and returns to the 1+1 DS1 SNCP List
View page, see Section
11.66.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- How to create 1+1 DS1 SNCP
protection for DS1 interfaces using the List View, see Section
6.7.1.2.
This page is used to create 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection for several interface
pairs simultaneously.
- Note:
- If MINI-LINK Connexion is used to provision
end-to-end DS1 connections, then only use the EEM to view current connections. Creating, modifying, and deleting
DS1 connections shall in this case be done with MINI-LINK
Connexion.

Figure 115 The Create Multiple 1+1 DS1 SNCP
page
- Interface Pairs - The
names of the interfaces in the protections.
- OK -
Creates the protections with default settings and returns to the 1+1 DS1
SNCP List View page, see Section
11.66. The settings can be changed later by modifying an existing
protection.
- Cancel - Closes the
page without creating any protections and returns to the 1+1 DS1 SNCP List
View page, see Section
11.66.
- How to create 1+1 DS1 SNCP
protection for DS1 interfaces using the List View, see Section
6.7.1.2.
This page is used to modify or delete a 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection.
- Note:
- If MINI-LINK Connexion is used to provision
end-to-end DS1 connections, then only use the EEM to view current connections. Creating, modifying, and deleting
DS1 connections shall in this case be done with MINI-LINK
Connexion.

Figure 116 The Modify 1+1 DS1 SNCP page
- Interfaces - Specifies
the interfaces in the protection.
- Type - The type or
role of the interface in the protection.
- DS1
1 - One of the interfaces selected for the protection.
- DS1
2 - The other interface selected for the protection.
- Protected DS1 - The
resulting "virtual" protected interface.
- Name - The name of
the interface.
- Note:
- An asterisk (*) at the end of the name
indicates a protected interface.
- Active - The
interface to carry traffic.
- Severity - The
alarm severity of the interface. See also Section
7.2.4.
- Information -
Information about the protection.
- Protection Status -
The status of the protection.
- Fully
Protected - Both interfaces are operating.
- Unprotected - The
active interface is operating but the passive interface fails.
- Complete Fail -
Both interfaces fail.
- Lock To
Fail - The active interface fails but the passive is operating and the
switch is locked to the active interface.
- Interface Mismatch
- The interfaces on both sides of the network connection are incompatible.
This status is set only when this can be detected.
- Switch
Count - The number of protection switches since the last
restart.
- Settings - Specifies
protection parameters.
- Hold-Off Time - The
time in seconds before an interface switch is initiated. Value range is
0.0 - 10.0.
- Switch
Mode - Specifies the way the traffic is switched between the interfaces.
- Automatic - The
traffic is automatically switched between the interfaces if a disturbance
occurs.
- Manual - An
operator has to switch interfaces manually using the Active option
on this page.
- Traffic
Routing - Enables traffic routing of the protected interface or a
modification of an existing traffic routing.
- Create - Opens the
Traffic Routing List View page, where the traffic routing is created,
see Section
11.59.
- Modify - Opens the
Modify Traffic Routing page, where the traffic routing can be
modified or deleted, see Section
11.63.
- OK -
Updates the protection configuration and returns to the page from which this
page was opened.
- Apply
- Modifies the protection routing without leaving the page. Only available
when this page is opened from the DS1 Overview page.
- Cancel - Closes the
page without changes and returns to the page from which this page was opened.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Delete - Deletes the
protection and returns to the page from which this page was opened.
- Configure
<Protected DS1 Interface> - Opens the DS1 Configuration page
for the protected interface, see Section
11.52.
- How to modify or delete 1+1
DS1 SNCP protection using the Matrix View, see Section
6.7.2.1.
- How to
modify or delete 1+1 DS1 SNCP protection using the List View, see Section
6.7.2.2.
This page is used to create APS protection including two adjacent
LTU 155s.

Figure 117 The Create APS Protection page
- Note:
- The page is only displayed when the units are
not included in an APS protection.
- Note:
- The two LTU 155s have to be placed in
adjacent AMM positions according to specifications in MINI-LINK TN ANSI Indoor Installation Manual.
- Note:
- Creating MSP protection will remove the
existing traffic routings on the LTU 155.
- Units - Information
about the two adjacent LTU 155s.
- Name - The name of
the unit.
- Status - The status
of the unit's OC-3/STS-3 port.
- Not
Configured - The port does not provide traffic until it is configured.
- Stand-alone VT1.5 -
The port has 84 DS1 interfaces and operates alone.
- Severity - The
severity for the unit. See also Section
7.2.4.
- OK -
Starts the APS creation process and opens the Creating Protection page,
see Section
11.71.
- Cancel - Closes the
page without creating any APS protection and returns to the page where this
page was opened.
This page displays the progress of an ongoing creation of APS protection. It
is automatically refreshed every fifth second to give an up-to-date status of
the progress. When both units are ready this page is replaced by the Modify
APS Protection page, see Section
11.72.

Figure 118 The Creating Protection page
- 0 of 2 units ready/1 of 2
units ready - The progress of the APS protection creation process.
This page is used to modify or delete an existing APS protection.

Figure 119 The Modify APS Protection page
- Units - Specifies
information about two adjacent LTU 155s.
- Name - The name of
the unit.
- Status - The status
of the unit's OC-3/STS-3 port.
- Not
Configured - The port does not provide traffic until it is configured.
- APS 1+1
VT1.5 - The unit is protected sharing 84 DS11 interfaces with its
adjacent unit. The unit with the currently active line is the one carrying
traffic. This is the status both units in the APS protection will always
have when this page is displayed.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
If the status is changed from APS 1+1
VT1.5 for either of the units the APS protection will be
deleted and the Deleting Protection page will be displayed,
see Section
11.73.
|
- Severity - The
severity for the unit. See also Section
7.2.4.
- Active
Line - The unit with the line interface that should carry traffic in the
receive direction. If the selected unit has alarms it will not be used as
the active line.
- Switch
Mode - Specifies how the active line should be switched when a failure
occurs on the unit with the currently active line.
- Automatic - A
switch is made when a failure occurs on the unit with the active line or
when you change the active line.
- Manual - A switch
is only made when you change the active line.
- Reset
- Reloads the page with its initial values.
- Apply
- Updates the APS configuration without leaving the page.
- Cancel - Closes the
page without modifying the APS protection and returns to the page where this
page was opened.
This page displays the progress of an ongoing deletion of APS protection. It
is automatically refreshed every fifth second to give an up-to-date status of
the progress. When both units are ready this page is replaced by the Create
MSP Protection page, see Section
11.70.

Figure 120 The Deleting Protection page
- 0 of 2 units ready/1 of 2
units ready - The progress of the APS protection deletion process.
- Specify
new status for unit - Re-specifies the desired status of the second unit's
OC-3/STS-3 port in the APS protection. This list and the OK button will
appear only if you leave the page and later on re-enter it by clicking the
APS Protection link on the LTU 155 Configuration page, see
Section
11.34. In this case the NE has lost the information about the selected
status of the second unit and you have to specify it again.
- Not
Configured - The port does not provide traffic until it is
configured.
- OK -
Submits the specified status.
This page displays hardware and software information about the NE. Units
without software modules will not be present in the software table.

Figure 121 The Inventory page
- Hardware - The name of
the hardware unit.
- Rack/Position - The
rack and position number.
- Product
Number - The product number of the hardware unit.
- Release - The
release state of the hardware unit.
- Serial
No. - The serial number of the hardware unit.
- Asset
ID - A user specified identity of the hardware unit. Clicking the link
opens the Edit Asset ID page, see Section
11.75.
- Software - The name
of the hardware unit containing a software module.
- Rack/Position - The
rack and position number.
- Product
Number - The product number of the software module.
- Release - The
release state of the software module.
- Common - Information
about the software baseline. If version control is disabled, N/A will be
displayed.
- Product
Number - The product number of the baseline.
- Release - The
release state of the baseline.
This page is used to specify identities of indoor hardware units.

Figure 122 The Edit Asset ID page
- Hardware - The name of
the unit.
- Rack/Position - The
rack and position number.
- Asset
ID - A user specified identity of the unit.
- OK -
Saves and returns to the Inventory page, see Section
11.74.
- Cancel - Closes the
page without saving and returns to the Inventory page, see Section
11.74.
This page is used to generate a report of the configuration and inventory
data of the NE. Select the check boxes for the items to be included in the
configuration report. The contents of the report are further described in Section
11.77.

Figure 123 The Report page
- Clear All - Clears all
check boxes.
- Select
All - Selects all check boxes.
- View
Report - Generates the report.
- Save
Report - Saves the report to a file. The format of the file is HTML 4 and
it can be opened in a number of different applications such as Microsoft Excel
and Microsoft Word.
This page displays a configuration and inventory report. References are
provided to help texts for the different parts of the report.

Figure 124 The View Report page. Note that the figure
shows only the beginning of the report.
The list below provides references to the pages where the data is set.
This page is the start page of a wizard providing a software upgrade to a
desired baseline of load modules, defined in a Software Baseline Description
File (SBDF).
- Note:
- MMU2 and SMU2 (protection) are upgraded using
MSM, Local Upgrade or MINI-LINK Manager.

Figure 125 The Upgrade Baseline page
- Current Baseline -
Information about the current baseline. If version control is disabled, N/A
will be displayed.
- Product
Number - The product number of the current baseline.
- Release - The
release state (version) of the current baseline.
- Conforming Modules
- Displays if the current software configuration is compliant with the
current baseline.
- Defined
by - Displays if the baseline is defined by Ericsson or not.
- View
Units - Opens the View Units page showing information about all
load modules in the units.
- FTP
server - The FTP server from which the new software should be downloaded.
- Remote
server - A permanent FTP server in the network.
- Local
server - The FTP server on the local PC.
- PC
- Enters the IP address of the local PC.
- User
Name - The user name used by the NE to log in to the FTP server. The
FTP server must be configured accordingly.
- Password - The
password used by the NE to log in to the FTP server. The FTP server must
be configured accordingly.
- Desired
Baseline - Information about the desired baseline.
- Note:
- The SBDF and the load modules must be stored
in specific folders under: <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_system_release\
ml_tn_software,
see Section
3.2.1.2.
- Product
Number - The product number of the desired baseline.
- Release - The
release state (version) of the desired baseline.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- Next
- Opens the Settings page, see Section
11.80.
This page is the start page of a wizard providing software upgrade of
specific load modules.
- Note:
- MMU2 and SMU2 ANSI (protection) are upgraded
using MSM, Local Upgrade or MINI-LINK Manager.

Figure 126 The Upgrade of Modules page
This page is used to define software upgrade settings.

Figure 127 The Settings page
- Activation - Specifies
the point of time when the new software configuration should be activated
after it has been downloaded to the NE.
- Immediate - The new
software configuration will be activated directly after all load modules
have been received successfully.
- Scheduled - The new
software will be activated at a specified occasion. Only to be used for an
upgrade of baseline and for automatic confirmation.
- Date - The
activation date (yyyy-mm-dd).
- Time - The
activation time (hh:mm).
- Confirmation -
Specifies the way the new software should be confirmed or rejected after it
has been activated.
- Manual - The
operator has to confirm the new software configuration within 15 minutes
after activation.
- Automatic - The NE
will confirm the new software configuration automatically.
- Preferences -
Displays the software upgrade preferences, specified on the Preferences
page, see Section
11.83. Preferences are only applicable for baseline upgrade.
- Back
- Opens the Upgrade of Baseline page or Upgrade of Modules page,
see Section
11.78 and Section
11.79.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- Next
- Opens the Start Upgrade page, see Section
11.81.
This page is used to start a software upgrade, summarizing the requested
actions.

Figure 128 The Start Upgrade page, when an upgrade of
baseline is performed
- Requested Actions -
Displays information of the upgrade to be performed.
- Upgrade
of Baseline - Displays the product number and release of the old and new
baseline. If version control is disabled, N/A will be displayed.
- Upgrade
of Modules - Displays the module type, product number and release of the
old and new load module.
- Settings
and Preferences - Displays the software upgrade settings and preferences,
see Section
11.80 and Section
11.83.
- Back
- Opens the Settings page, see Section
11.80.
- Start
Upgrade - Initiates the software upgrade. Opens the Upgrade Progress -
Baseline page or Upgrade Progress - Modules page, see Section
11.84 or Section
11.85.
- Note:
- Software upgrade to
MINI-LINK TN R3 requires a license. See Section
6.3 for more information on how to work with
licenses.
This page shows information about the load modules in all units.

Figure 129 The View Units page
- Load modules in boards
- Information about the load modules in the units.
- Unit - The name of
the unit.
- Module
Type - The name of the load module.
- Product
Number - The product number of the load module.
- Release - The
release state (version) of the load module.
- Status - The status
of the load module.
- Min.
Release - The minimum required release state (version) of the
unit.
This page is used to define software upgrade preferences. Preferences are
only applicable for a baseline upgrade.

Figure 130 The Preferences page
- Preferences - Specifies
the software upgrade preferences.
- Version
Control - Checks if load modules comply to a certain baseline. Enabled
by default.
Clearing the check box disables Version Control (sets it to OFF). If you
want to enable Version Control, you must do an upgrade of baseline.
After an upgrade of baseline, Version Control is automatically
enabled.
After an upgrade of modules, Version Control is automatically disabled
(OFF).
- Automatic Upgrade -
Automatically performs software upgrade of units with a software revision
older than the one specified by the baseline. Selected by default.
If Version Control is enabled, a check against the baseline will be done
and an automatic software upgrade will be performed if needed.
- Automatic Downgrade
- Automatically performs software downgrade of units with newer software
revision than the one specified by the baseline. Selected by default.
If Version Control is enabled, a check against the baseline will be done
and an automatic software downgrade will be performed if needed.
- Note:
- If neither Automatic Upgrade nor
Automatic Downgrade is selected when performing an upgrade of
baseline, then no units will be upgraded or downgraded.
- Accept
Failures - Sets units In Service also if a software upgrade or downgrade
failed. Selected by default.
A typical reason for failing is that Version Control is enabled and some
of the software baseline load modules are not available.
Clearing the check box sets inserted or cold restarted units Out of
Service if any automatic software upgrade or downgrade failed. Units that
are already In Service will be set to Reduced Service in order not to
disturb traffic as a result of a failing software upgrade.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page shows the progress of a baseline upgrade.

Figure 131 The Upgrade Progress - Baseline
page
This page shows the progress of a load module upgrade.

Figure 132 The Upgrade Progress - Modules
page
- Software Upgrade
License - Displays information about the software upgrade license.
- Feature - The name
of the feature.
- Status - The status
of the license.
- Upgrade
of Modules - Displays information about the upgrade of load modules.
- Cancel - Cancels the
upgrade and returns to the Upgrade of Baseline page, see Section
11.78.
- Activate - Activates
the new software configuration (immediate activation). The Activation in
Progress page is displayed during the activation, see Section
11.87.
- Fallback - Reverts to
the old software configuration.
- Confirm - Manually
confirms the new software configuration.
- Event
Log - A log of events related to the software upgrade process.
- Severity - The
severity of an entry. See also Section
7.2.4.
- Event
Type - Displays the category of an entry.
- Alarm
ID - Displays the identity of an entry. Alarms have an ID number while
an event is identified as Event. Clicking a link
displays more detailed information about a particular ID.
- Event
Time - The time when the entry occurred.
- Object - Indicating
where the entry was generated.
- Specific Problem -
The specific problem of the entry. See also Section
7.2.5.
This page is displayed when the NE is scheduled for an activation of a new
software configuration (only upgrade of baseline).

Figure 133 The Scheduled Activation page
- Cancel - Cancels the
scheduled activation and returns to the Upgrade of Baseline page, see
Section
11.78.
This page is displayed when a new software configuration is activated.

Figure 134 The Activation in Progress
page
This page is used to manually confirm the activation of the new software
configuration, when performing an upgrade of baseline.

Figure 135 The Confirm New Software Configuration
page
|
 |
Caution! |
|
If no button is clicked on this page within 15 minutes the
NE will revert to the old software configuration.
|
- Old Software
Configuration - The product number and release state (version) of the
previous software configuration.
- Fallback - Reverts to
the old software configuration.
- New
Software Configuration - The product number and release state (version) of
the new software configuration.
- Confirm - Confirms
the new software configuration.
This page is used to save a backup file of a configuration on an FTP server
or to restore a configuration using a backup file.
- Note:
- Activating a configuration file that has been
fetched from another NE will revert the user passwords to default factory
settings. See also Section
9.1.

Figure 136 The Load Configuration page
- Configuration File -
Specifies the load to be performed.
- Upload
to FTP server - A configuration file is uploaded to an FTP server to be
used as backup configuration.
- Download from FTP
server - A configuration file is downloaded from an FTP server to be
used to restore a configuration.
- File
Name - The name of the configuration file. It can be maximum 80
characters long. The configuration files are located in the <drive:>\tn_ftp_home\tn_backup_configuration folder
on the FTP server. A configuration file is named <hostname>.cfg where <hostname> is typically the name or IP address of
an NE. The file extension .cfg.old is used when a
configuration file is uploaded using a file name that already exists.
- Browse -- Browse
for the location where to download/upload on the FTP server.
- Note:
- Since tn_backup_configuration is likely to hold configuration
files belonging to several NEs it is important to use file names that can
easily be identified.
- FTP -
Specifies the FTP server to be used. Only available in Normal mode.
- Remote
server @ <IP address> - Specifies that the permanent FTP server in
the network should be used. See also Section
11.16.
- Local
server - Specifies that the local FTP server should be used.
- User
Name - The user name used by the NE to log in to the FTP server. The
FTP server must be configured accordingly.
- Password - The
password used by the NE to log in to the FTP server. The FTP server must
be configured accordingly.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Opens the Load Configuration Progress page, see Section
11.90.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the wizard. Only available in the
installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
This page is used to display the progress of an ongoing upload or download of
a configuration file.

Figure 137 The Load Configuration Progress
page
- Configuration File -
Information about the ongoing process.
- Progress - Displays
the status of the upload or download.
- File
Name - The name of the configuration file.
- Software Upgrade -
Displays the progress of a software upgrade started automatically in NPU
Installation mode or Node Installation mode, if the configuration file
specified a different NPU software release than the one currently active.
Only available if a software upgrade is in progress.
- Update
Progress - Updates the page with the latest information about the
progress. Only available when status is Downloading or
Uploading.
- OK -
Opens the Load Configuration page, where a new configuration file can
be loaded, see Section
11.89. Only available when status is Upload Failed
or Download Failed.
- Back
- Navigates one step backward in the wizard. Only available in the
installation wizard.
- Note:
- Configurations that you have performed are
not reversed.
- Next
- Navigates one step forward in the wizard. Only available in the installation
wizard.
This page is used to preview a downloaded configuration before activating
it.

Figure 138 The Load Configuration Preview
page
- File - The name of the
configuration file.
- Created - The date
and time when the configuration file was created.
- DCN
Settings - The DCN parameters as defined in the configuration file.
- Hardware
Inventory - An inventory of the hardware that was present when this
configuration file was created.
- Cancel - Cancels the
load of the configuration.
- Activate - Activates
the configuration.
This page is used to perform a restart of the NE or a single unit.

Figure 139 The Restart page
- Note:
- A restart of the NE or NPU will clear the Alarm
List, Performance and Event Logs. Configurations that have not been saved,
active loops and running BERTs will be lost.
- Note:
- During a restart of the NE, the PC will lose
contact with the Web server. Click Refresh or Reload in your
browser after the NE has restarted to connect to the Web server.
- Restart - Selects the
type of restart.
- Cold
Restart - Initiates a complete restart of the NE or unit.
|
 |
Caution! |
|
A cold restart will disturb the traffic.
|
- Warm
Restart - Restarts the control and management system of all units. Only
available on NE level.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
This page is used to specify the location of the Help file by typing the path
in the text box. For more information on how to set up and use the Help, see Section
4.6.

Figure 140 The Help Setup page
- Help Setup - Specifies
the location of the Help file.
- Type
the location of the Help file - The path of the Help file.
- Insert
default local path - Inserts the default location on the local hard
drive, file:///C:/MINI-LINK/Documentation/TN_help/,
where MINI-LINK TN Help files are stored. Add the remaining part, ANSI_<revision>/help.html,
manually to get the complete path of the file.
- Insert
default server path - Inserts the default folder, http://10.0.0.2/MINI-LINK/Documentation/TN_help/, on
the local hard drive where MINI-LINK TN Help files are stored. Add the
remaining part, ANSI_<revision>/help.html, manually to get the complete
path of the file.
- Reset
- Resets all settings to their initial values.
- Apply
- Applies all changes you have made without leaving the page.
- Note:
- A security feature in Internet Explorer 6 SP1
sometimes denies the browser to access the Help on your PC. Should this occur
do the following in your browser: Click Tools->Internet
Options->Security-> and add http://<IP address of the NE> as a "Trusted
Site".
This page shows a list of features that are possible to activate with
licenses. This list of features is based on the current hardware
configuration.
- Note:
- If you have installed licenses for features
that cannot be used in the current hardware configuration, those features will
also be shown in the list. That is, they are shown, but cannot be
activated.

Figure 141 The Licenses page
This page is used to create a license request file.

Figure 142 The Create License Request page
This page shows a list of all LKFs that are stored on the RMM.

Figure 143 The License File Overview page
This page shows a list of all features with installed licenses.

Figure 144 The License File Inventory page
- Fingerprint - The
fingerprint of the RMM on the NPU.
- Reload - Reloads the
page.
- Filter - Applies the
selected filter to the Feature List.
- Feature
List - A list of features with installed licenses.
If several LKFs contains licenses for the same feature, the list will
contain one entry for each LKF. For example, if two LKFs both contains a
license for a specific feature, that feature will appear twice in the
list.
Clicking a feature opens the License
File Content page (see Section
11.98), showing the XML source of the LKF containing this
feature.
- Number - The
product number of the optional feature.
- Name - The
description of the optional feature.
- Installed - The
number of installed licenses for the optional feature.
This page shows the XML source of an LKF.

Figure 145 The Install Licenses page
- Issuer - The name of
the issuer of the LKF, that is, the entity that generated the file.
- Fingerprint - The
fingerprint of the RMM for which this LKF was generated.
- Seq.
Number - The sequence number of the LKF. This number is incremented every
time an issuer generates an LKF for a specific fingerprint.
- Ver -
The version of the LKF format.
- Generation Date - The
date when the LKF was generated.
- Installation Date -
The date when the LKF was downloaded to the LKF.
- SWLT
- The software license target identity as defined by the issuer for
administrative purposes.
- Status - The status
of the LKF.
- LKF
Source - The XML source of the LKF.
- Back
- Navigates to the page where you came from.
This page is used to clear the reservation of a position in the AMM. A
position is reserved for a plug-in unit of the same type whenever a plug-in unit
is removed.
To use this position for another type of plug-in unit, the reservation must
be cleared. You can also clear a reservation without inserting a new plug-in
unit to indicate that this position is no longer used.

Figure 146 The Clear Reservation page
Each row in the list represents a position in the AMM. To clear a
reservation, select the check box for that position and then click
Apply.
- Position List - A list
of all positions in he AMM that are reserved.
- Clear - Selects the
position to clear.
- Position - The
reserved position in the AMM.
- Reserved Unit - The
name of the unit for which this position is reserved.
In case the Position State is Wrong Unit,
this is not the name of the
erroneously inserted unit.
- Reserved Product
Number - The product number of the unit for which this position is
reserved.
In case the Position State is Wrong Unit,
this is not the product number of
the erroneously inserted unit.
- Position State -
The state of the position: Inaccessible Unit or Wrong Unit. See Section
10.1.1 for more information about position states.
- Apply
- Clears the selected reservations.
This page gives an overview of the alarms and status of the NE and its
plug-in units.

Figure 147 The NE Alarms and Status page for an AMM
20p
The position of a plug-in unit is indicated by a figure. Each unit is
identified by a label and its accumulated status is indicated by a color. A
bluish-green color indicates that a unit has notifications disabled or
administration status set to Out of Service. Moving the pointer over a unit will
display a tool tip with information on unit type, operational status and
severity. Clicking a unit will open the Alarms and Status page for the
unit.
Equipment protection is indicated by the text 1+1. The active LTU 155 ANSI
and MMU2 BA/CA is indicated by a label, while the active MMU2 is indicated in
MSM.
A warning will be displayed if notifications from the NE are disabled.
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Network Element -
Displays alarms and status information related to the NE.
- Status - Displays
the status of the NE.
- In
Service - The NE is operating properly.
- Reduced
Service - Traffic is running, but the management functionality is
reduced or unavailable.
- Out of
Service - The NE is not operating.
- Alarms - Displays
the NE alarms. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- NTP
Status - Displays the operational status of an NTP service. Only
available if the NE is configured to use an NTP server.
- Up
- Contact established with NTP server.
- Down - Contact lost
with NTP server.
- Units
- Displays the accumulated status of each unit in the AMM. MMUs are shown
together with their RAUs.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the alarms and status of the Ethernet Bridge, implemented
in the NPU2 A. It also displays counters for the HDLC and Ethernet interfaces,
if desired.

Figure 148 The Ethernet Bridge Alarms and Status
page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- General - Displays
general bridge information.
- Bridge
MAC Address - The physical address of the Ethernet port.
- Far End
MAC Address - The physical address of the far end port.
- Ethernet/Bridge
Interface - The identity of the bridge's internal Ethernet interface.
- Ethernet/Bridge
Status - The status of the bridge's internal Ethernet interface.
- Up
- Ethernet carrier detected.
- Down - Ethernet
carrier not detected.
- Speed -- Speed in
Mbit/s
- Size -- The size of
the largest protocol data unit, in octets that can be sent / received on the
interface.
- HDLC
Encapsulation - Displays information about the HDLC encapsulation
interface. This interface holds 1 to 16 Inverse Multiplexer (IM) interfaces,
that is one IM interface per DS1 in the bridge.
- Status - The status
of the interface.
- Up
- Payload is passing on the interface.
- Down - A defect is
detected on the interface.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms on the interface. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- Speed - The speed
in Mbit/s.
- Size - The size of
the largest protocol data unit, in octets, that can be sent or received on
the interface.
- Notifications -
Indicates if notifications are enabled on the interface.
- DS1
Inverse Multiplexer - Displays information about the Inverse Multiplexer
(IM) interfaces. One IM interface is associated with one DS1 interface.
- IM
<ID> - The name of the IM interface.
- Status - The status
of the interface.
- Up
- Payload is passing on the interface.
- Down - A defect is
detected on the interface.
- No
Multi Frame - Can also be displayed for the far end.
- Wrong
MAC Address - Can also be displayed for the far end.
- Unsupported MUX
Scheme - Can also be displayed for the far end.
- Link
Degraded (Too much CRC4) - Can also be displayed for the far end.
- Unsupported
Protocol - Can also be displayed for the far end.
- Delay
Too High/Low - Can also be displayed for the far end.
- No
Control Frame - Can also be displayed for the far end.
- Duplicated Link -
Only displayed for the near end.
- Connected To -
Displays the associated DS1. Clicking a link opens the DS1 Alarms and
Status page for the interface, see Section
11.134.
- Status - Displays
the status of the DS1 interfaces associated with the IM interfaces.
- Counters - Displays
counters for the HDLC and Ethernet interfaces.
- Received - Counters
for the received packets.
- Octets - The number
of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
- Unicast - The
number of sub-network unicast packets delivered to a higher layer
protocol.
- Multicast - The
number of sub-network multicast packets delivered to a higher layer
protocol.
- Broadcast - The
number of sub-network broadcast packets delivered to a higher layer
protocol.
- Discarded - The
number of inbound packets discarded, even though no error was detected,
preventing them from being delivered to a higher layer protocol (for
example buffer overflow).
- Error - The number
of inbound packets that contain error, preventing them from being
delivered to a higher layer protocol.
- Transmitted -
Counters for the transmitted packets.
- Octets - The number
of octets transmitted on the interface, including framing characters.
- Unicast - The
number of packets that higher layer protocols requested to be transmitted
to a sub-network unicast address, including those that were discarded or
otherwise not sent.
- Multicast - The
number of multicast packets that higher layer protocols requested to be
transmitted to a sub-network multicast address, including those that were
discarded or otherwise not sent.
- Broadcast - The
number of packets that higher layer protocols requested to be transmitted
to a sub-network broadcast address, including those that were discarded or
otherwise not sent.
- Discarded - The
number of outbound packets discarded, even through no errors had been
detected, preventing them from being transmitted (for example buffer
overflow).
- Error - The number
of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of
error.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
- Show
Counters - Enables the display of counters. The display is disabled by
default.
- Clear
HDLC Counters - Clears the HDLC counters.
- Clear
Ethernet Counters - Clears the Ethernet counters.
- Hide
Counters - Disables the display of counters.
This page displays the status of the Bridge interface on ETU2.

Figure 149 The Bridge Alarm and Status
page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- General - Displays
general bridge information.
- Bridge
MAC Address - The physical address of the Ethernet port.
- Bridge - Displays
information about the Bridge interface.
- Status - The status
of the interface.
- Up
- Payload is passing on the interface.
- Down - A defect is
detected on the interface.
- Speed - The speed
in Mbit/s.
- Duplex - The Duplex
status.
- Size - The size of
the largest protocol data unit, in octets, that can be sent or received on
the interface.
- Notifications -
Indicates if notifications are enabled on the interface.
- IM
Group - Status of the IM Group interface.
- Near
End MAC - MAC address of the near end interface.
- Far End
MAC - MAC address of the far end interface.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the interface.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit, or Off if notifications
are disabled. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- Speed - The speed
in Mbit/s.
- Size - The size of
the largest protocol data unit, in octets, that can be sent or received on
the interface.
- IM
Link - Status of the IM link.
- DS1
Status - Displays the operational status of the interface.
- IM Link
Status - Displays the operational status of the IM link.
- Near
End - Displays the operational status of the far-end interface.
- Far
End - Displays the operational status of the far-end interface.
- Counters - Displays
counters for the IM Group and Bridge interfaces.
- Received - Counters
for the received packets.
- Octets - The number
of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
- Unicast - The
number of sub-network unicast packets delivered to a higher layer
protocol.
- Multicast - The
number of sub-network multicast packets delivered to a higher layer
protocol.
- Broadcast - The
number of sub-network broadcast packets delivered to a higher layer
protocol.
- Discarded - The
number of inbound packets discarded, even though no error was detected,
preventing them from being delivered to a higher layer protocol (for
example buffer overflow).
- Error - The number
of inbound packets that contain error, preventing them from being
delivered to a higher layer protocol.
- Transmitted -
Counters for the transmitted packets.
- Octets - The number
of octets transmitted on the interface, including framing characters.
- Unicast - The
number of packets that higher layer protocols requested to be transmitted
to a sub-network unicast address, including those that were discarded or
otherwise not sent.
- Multicast - The
number of multicast packets that higher layer protocols requested to be
transmitted to a sub-network multicast address, including those that were
discarded or otherwise not sent.
- Broadcast - The
number of packets that higher layer protocols requested to be transmitted
to a sub-network broadcast address, including those that were discarded or
otherwise not sent.
- Discarded - The
number of outbound packets discarded, even through no errors had been
detected, preventing them from being transmitted (for example buffer
overflow).
- Error - The number
of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of
error.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
- Show
Counters - Enables the display of counters. The display is disabled by
default.
- Clear IM
GroupCounters - Clears the IM Group counters.
- Clear
Bridge Counters - Clears the Bridge counters.
- Hide
Counters - Disables the display of counters.
This page displays the status of the LAN interface.

Figure 150 The LAN Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- LAN <ID> - The
name of the LAN interface.
- MAC
Address - The MAC address.
- Status - The
operational status of the interface.
- Up
- Ethernet carrier detected.
- Down - Ethernet
carrier not detected.
- Notifications -
Displays if notifications from the interface are enabled (on) or disabled
(off).
- Speed
(Mbit/s) - The speed in Mbit/s.
- Size - The size of
the largest protocol data unit, in octets that can be sent or received on
the interface.
- Received - Parameters
for received packets.
- Octets - The number
of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
- Unicast - The
number of sub-network unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol.
- Discarded - The
number of inbound packets discarded, even though no error was detected,
preventing them from being delivered to a higher layer protocol (for example
buffer overflow).
- Error - The number
of inbound packets that contain error, preventing them from being delivered
to a higher layer protocol.
- Transmitted -
Parameters for transmitted packets.
- Octets - The number
of octets transmitted on the interface, including framing characters.
- Unicast - The
number of packets that higher layer protocols requested to be transmitted to
a sub-network unicast address, including those that were discarded or
otherwise not sent.
- Discarded - The
number of outbound packets discarded, even through no errors had been
detected, preventing them from being transmitted (for example buffer
overflow).
- Error - The number
of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of error.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the status of the USB interface on the NPU2, NPU1 B and
ATU NPU.

Figure 151 The USB Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Local Access <ID>
- The name of the interface. N/A indicates Not Applicable.
- Status - Indicates if
a PC is connected or not.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the status of the PPP and ML-PPP interfaces.

Figure 152 The PPP Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- ML-PPP Name - The name
of a Multilink PPP interface, that is all PPP interfaces destined to the same
IP address. A Multilink PPP interface is indicated by a frame. N/A indicates
not applicable.
- PPP
Name - The name of the PPP interface.
- ML-PPP
Status - The status of the Multilink PPP interface.
- Up
- The interface can be used for DCN communication.
- Down - The
interface can not be used for DCN communication.
- PPP
Status - The status of the PPP interface.
- Speed
- The speed in bit/s.
- Size
- The size of the largest protocol data unit, in octets that can be sent or
received on the interface.
- Notif. - Displays if
notifications from the interface are enabled (on) or disabled (off).
- Remote IP
Address - The remote IP address.
- PPP and
ML-PPP Counters - Opens the PPP and ML-PPP Counters page, see Section
11.106.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the status of the PPP and ML-PPP counters.

Figure 153 The PPP and ML-PPP Counters
page
- PPP - Displays the
status of the PPP counters.
- Received - The
received PPP counters.
- Octets - The number
of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
- Unicast - The
number of sub-network unicast packets delivered to a higher layer
protocol.
- Discarded - The
number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no
errors had been detected to prevent them from being delivered to a higher
layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be
to free up buffer space.
- Error - The number
of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being
deliverable to a higher layer protocol.
- Unknown
Protocol - The number of packets received via the interface which were
discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.
- Transmitted - The
transmitted PPP counters.
- Octets - The number
of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
- Unicast - The
number of packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted
to a sub-network unicast address, including those that were discarded or
not sent.
- Discarded - The
number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though
no errors had been detected to prevent them from being transmitted. One
possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer
space.
- Error - The number
of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of
errors.
- ML-PPP - Displays the
ML-PPP counters, as described above.
- Back
- Opens the PPP Status page, see Section
11.105.
This page displays the status of the TCP parameters.

Figure 154 The TCP Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- General - Displays
general TCP parameters.
- Active
Opens - The number of active open TCP ports.
- Passive
Opens - The number of passive TCP ports.
- Attempt
Fails - The number of failed connection attempts.
- Resets - The number
of resets that have occurred.
- Established - The
number of TCP connections for which the current state is either Established or Close Wait.
- Received Segments -
The number of received segments, including those received in error.
- Transmitted
Segments - The number of transmitted segments, excluding those
containing only retransmitted octets.
- Retransmitted
Segments - The number of retransmitted segments.
- Received Errors -
The number of segments received in error.
- Transmitted RST
flags - The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST (reset)
flag.
- TCP
Connections - Displays the TCP connections.
- Local
IP Address - The local IP address of the TCP connection.
- Local
Port - The local port number.
- Remote
IP Address - The remote IP address of the TCP connection.
- Remote
Port - The remote port number.
- State - The state
of the TCP connection.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the status of the UDP parameters.

Figure 155 The UDP Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- General - Displays
general UDP parameters.
- Received - The
number of UDP datagrams delivered to UDP users.
- No
Ports - The number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no
application at the destination port.
- Received Errors -
The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons
other than lack of application at the destination port.
- Transmitted - The
number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity.
- UDP
Listeners - Displays general UDP parameters.
- Local
IP Address - The local IP address of this UDP listener.
- Local
Port - The local port number of this UDP listener.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the status of the ARP parameters for the effected Ethernet
interfaces.

Figure 156 The ARP Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Physical Address - The
physical (MAC) address of the Ethernet interface.
- Network
Address - The network address of the Ethernet interface.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the status of the IP/ICMP parameters.

Figure 157 The IP/ICMP Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- IP - Displays IP
parameters.
- Forwarding -
Indicates whether this entity is acting as an IP router in respect to the
forwarding of datagrams received by, but not addressed to, this entity.
- Received - The
number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received
in error.
- Forwarded - The
number of input datagrams that have been forwarded.
- Discarded - The
number of input datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent
their continued processing, but which were discarded (for example due to
lack of buffer space).
- Delivered - The
number of input datagrams successfully delivered.
- Transmission
Requests - The number of datagrams that local IP user protocols supplied
to IP in requests for transmission.
- Fragments - The
number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this
entity.
- Reassembled - The
number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled.
- Routing
Discarded - The number of routing entries discarded even though
valid.
- ICMP
- Displays ICMP parameters.
- Received - The
number of ICMP messages.
- Errors - The number
of ICMP messages with ICMP errors.
- Destination
Unreachable - The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages
received.
- Transmitted - The
number of ICMP messages that this entity attempted to send.
- IP
Addresses - Displays an address table for the Ethernet and ML-PPP
interfaces.
- IP
Address - The IP address of the interface.
- Subnet
Mask - The subnet mask of the interface.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays static routing parameters.

Figure 158 The Static Routing Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Destination - The
destination IP address of this route.
- Route
Mask - The netmask for the destination IP address.
- Gateway - The address
of the next system on the route (only used for remote routes, 0.0.0.0
otherwise).
- Static
Routing Configuration - Opens the Static Routing Configuration
page, see Section
11.18.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays general OSPF parameters.

Figure 159 The OSPF General Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Router ID - A unique
identifier of the router in the Autonomous System (AS).
- Admin.
Status - The administrative status of OSPF in the router. Enabled denotes that the OSPF process is active on at least
one interface. Disabled denotes that the OSPF process is
disabled on all interfaces.
- Version - The current
version of the OSPF protocol.
- Status - Indicates
whether this is an Area Border Router (ABR).
- ASBR
Status - Indicates whether this is an Autonomous System Border Router
(ASBR)
- Ext. LSA
Count - The number of external (LS type 5) Link State Advertisements (LSA)
in the link state database.
- Ext. LSA
Checksum - Checksums of the external link state advertisements contained
in the link state database. This sum can be used to determine if there has
been a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state
database of two routers.
- TOS
Support - The router's support for Type Of Service (TOS) routing.
- Originated New LSA
Count - The number of new LSAs that have been originated. This number is
incremented each time the router originates a new LSA.
- Received
New LSA Count - The number of LSAs received, determined to be new
instantiations. This number does not include newer instantiations of
self-originated LSAs.
- Ext. LS
Limit - The maximum number of non-default AS-external-LSAs entries that
can be stored in the link state database. If the value is -1, then there is no
limit. When the number of non-default AS-external-LSAs in a router's link
state database reaches Ext. LS Limit, the router enters Overflow State. The
router never holds more than Ext. LS Limit non-default AS-external-LSAs in its
database. Ext. LS Limit must be set identically in all routers attached to the
OSPF backbone and/or any regular OSPF area (that is, OSPF stub areas and NSSAs
are excluded).
- Multicast
Extension - A bit mask indicating whether the router is forwarding IP
multicast (Class D) datagrams based on the algorithms defined in the multicast
extensions to OSPF.
Bit 0, if set, indicates that the router can forward IP multicast datagrams
in the router's directly attached areas (called intra-area multicast
routing).
Bit 1, if set, indicates that the router can forward IP multicast datagrams
between OSPF areas (called inter-area multicast routing).
Bit 2, if set, indicates that the router can forward IP multicast datagrams
between Autonomous Systems (called inter-AS multicast routing).
Only certain combinations of bit settings are allowed, namely:
| |
0 |
No multicast forwarding is enabled. This is the default
value. |
| |
1 |
Intra-area multicasting only. |
| |
3 |
Intra-area and inter-area multicasting. |
| |
5 |
Intra-area and inter-AS multicasting. |
| |
7 |
Multicasting everywhere. |
- Exit
Overflow Interval - The number of seconds that, after entering Overflow
State, a router will attempt to leave Overflow State. This allows the router
to again originate non-default AS-external-LSAs. When set to 0, the router
will not leave Overflow State until restarted.
- Demand
Extensions - The router's support for demand routing.
- OSPF
Configuration - Opens the OSPF Area Configuration page, see Section
11.20.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays OSPF area parameters.

Figure 160 The OSPF Area Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Area - Displays area
parameters.
- ID
- A unique identifier of the area. Area ID 0.0.0.0 is used for the OSPF
backbone.
- Auth.
Type - The authentication type specified for an area. Additional
authentication types may be assigned locally on a per area basis.
- Import
AS External - The area's support for importing AS-external-LSAs.
- SPF
Runs - The number of times that the intra-area route table has been
calculated using this area's link state database.
- ABR
Count - The total number of ABRs reachable within this area. This is
initially 0, and is calculated in each SPF pass.
- ASBR
Count - The total number of ASBRs reachable within this area. This is
initially 0, and is calculated in each SPF pass.
- LSA
Count - The total number of LSAs in this area's link state database,
excluding AS-external-LSAs.
- LSA
Checksum - The 32-bit unsigned sum of the LSA's LS checksums contained
in this area's link state database. This sum excludes external (LS type 5)
LSAs. The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a
router's link state database, and to compare the link state database of two
routers.
- Summary - Controls
the import of summary LSAs into stub areas. It has no effect on other areas.
If it is no Area Summary, the router will neither
originate nor propagate summary LSAs into the stub area. It will rely
entirely on its default route. If it is Send Area
Summary, the router will both summarize and propagate summary
LSAs.
- Stub
Area - Displays stub area parameters.
- ID
- A unique identifier of the stub area.
- TOS
- The Type Of Service (TOS) associated with the metric.
- Metric - The metric
value applied at the indicated TOS. By default, this equals the least metric
at the TOS among the interfaces with other areas.
- Metric
Type - The type of metric advertised as a default route.
- Area
Aggregate - Displays area aggregate parameters.
- Area
ID - The area the address aggregate is to be found within.
- LS
Type - The type of link state this address aggregate applies to.
- Network - The IP
address of the net or subnet indicated by the range.
- Mask - The subnet
mask that pertains to the net or subnet.
- Effect - Subnets
subsumed by ranges either trigger the advertisement of the indicated
aggregate (Advertise Matching), or result in the subnets not being
advertised at all outside the area.
- OSPF
Configuration - Opens the OSPF Area Configuration page, see Section
11.20.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays OSPF interface parameters.

Figure 161 The OSPF Interface Status page. Note that the
figure does not show all parameters that will be displayed on the
screen.
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Interface - Displays
interface parameters.
- IP
Address - The IP address of the OSPF interface
- Addressless IF -
Differentiates the addressless interfaces from the addressed interfaces. The
value 0 signifies that the interface has an IP address.
- Area
ID - A unique identifier of the area. Area ID 0.0.0.0 is used for the
OSPF backbone.
- Type - The OSPF
interface type.
- Admin.
Status - The administrative status of the OSPF interface. When the value
is set to Enabled, it signifies that the neighbor
relationships may be formed on the interface, and the interface is
advertised as an internal route to some area. When the value is set to Disabled, it signifies that the interface is external to
OSPF.
- Router
Priority - The priority of this interface. When the value is set to 0,
it signifies that the router is not eligible to become the designated router
on this particular network.
- Transit
Delay - The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link
state update packet over this interface.
- Retransmit Interval
- The number of seconds between the link state advertisement
retransmissions, for adjacencies belonging to this interface. This value is
also used when retransmitting database description and link state request
packets.
- Hello
Interval - The time interval, in seconds, between the Hello packets that
the router sends on the interface. This value must be the same for all the
routers attached to a common network.
- Router
Dead Interval - The number of seconds that a router's Hello packets have
not been seen before it's neighbors declare the router down. This should be
some multiple of the Hello Interval. This value must be the same for all
routers attached to a common network.
- Poll
Interval - The larger time interval, in seconds, between the Hello
packets sent to an inactive non-broadcast multi-access neighbor.
- State - The OSPF
interface state.
- Designated Router -
The IP address of the designated router.
- Backup
Designated Router - The IP address of the backup designated router.
- Events
- The number of times this OSPF interface has changed its state, or an
error has occurred.
- Auth.
Key - The authentication key.
- Multicast
Forwarding - The way multicasts should be forwarded on this interface,
not forwarded, forwarded as datalink multicasts or forwarded as data link
unicasts. Data link multicasting is not meaningful on PPP and NBMA
interfaces. The value 0 effectively disables all multicast forwarding.
- Demand - Indicates
whether demand OSPF procedures (Hello suppression to FULL neighbors and
setting the DoNotAge flag on propagated LSAs) should be performed on this
interface.
- Auth.
Type - The authentication type specified for an area. Additional
authentication types may be assigned locally on a per area basis.
- Interface
Metric - Displays interface metric parameters.
- IP
Address - The IP address of the OSPF interface
- Addressless IF -
Differentiates the addressless interfaces from the addressed interfaces. The
value 0 signifies that the interface has an IP address.
- TOS
- The Type Of Service (TOS) metric being referenced.
- Value - The metric
of using this TOS on this interface. The default value of the TOS 0 metric
is 108/Speed.
- Virtual
Interface - Displays virtual interface parameters.
- Area
ID - The transit area that the virtual link traverses. By definition,
this is not 0.0.0.0.
- Neighbor - The
router ID of the virtual neighbor.
- Transit
Delay - The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link
state update packet over this interface.
- Retransmit Interval
- The number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions,
for adjacencies belonging to this interface. This value is also used when
retransmitting the database description and link state request packets. This
value should be greater than the expected round-trip time.
- Hello
Interval - The time interval, in seconds, between the Hello packets that
the router sends on the interface. This value must be the same for the
virtual neighbor.
- Router
Dead Interval - The time interval, in seconds, during which a router's
Hello packets are not received before its neighbors declare the router down.
This is a multiple of the Hello interval. This value must be the same for
the virtual neighbor.
- State - Signifies
the OSPF virtual interface states.
- Events - The number
of state changes or error events on this virtual link.
- Auth.
Key - The authentication key.
- Auth.
Type - The authentication type specified for a virtual interface.
Additional authentication types may be assigned locally.
- OSPF
Configuration - Opens the OSPF Area Configuration page, see Section
11.20.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays OSPF neighbor parameters.

Figure 162 The OSPF Neighbor Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Neighbor - Displays
neighbor parameters.
- IP
Address - The IP address this neighbor is using in its IP source
address. Note that on addressless links, this will not be 0.0.0.0, but the
address of another of the neighbor's interfaces.
- Addressless
Interface - Differentiates the addressless interfaces from the addressed
interfaces. When the value is set to 0, it signifies that the interface has
an IP address.
- Router
ID - A unique identifier of the neighboring router in the Autonomous
System (AS).
- Options - A bit
mask corresponding to the neighbor's options field.
Bit 0, if set, indicates that the system will operate on TOS metrics
other than TOS 0. If the value is 0, the neighbor will ignore all metrics
except the TOS 0 metric.
Bit 1, if set, indicates that the associated area accepts and operates on
external information. If the value is 0, it is a stub area.
Bit 2, if set, indicates that the system is capable of routing IP
multicast datagrams, implementing the multicast extensions to OSPF.
Bit 3, if set, indicates that the associated area is a Not So Stubby Area
(NSSA). These areas are capable of carrying type 7 external advertisements,
which are translated into type 5 external advertisements at NSSA
borders.
- Priority -
Signifies the priority of this neighbor in the designated router. When the
value is set to 0, it signifies that the neighbor is not eligible to become
the designated router on this particular network.
- State - The state
of the relationship with this neighbor.
- Events - The number
of times this neighbor relationship has changed state, or an error has
occurred.
- LS
Retransmit Q Len - The current length of the retransmission queue.
- Permanence - This
variable displays the status of the entry. Dynamic and
Permanent refer to how the neighbor became known.
- Hello
Suppressed - Indicates whether Hellos are being suppressed to the
neighbor.
- Virtually
Neighbor - Displays virtual neighbor parameters.
- Area - The transit
area identifier.
- Router
ID - A unique identifier of the neighboring router in the Autonomous
System (AS).
- IP
Address - The IP address this virtual neighbor is using.
- Options - A bit
mask corresponding to the neighbor's options field.
Bit 1, if set, indicates that the system will operate on TOS metrics
other than TOS 0. If the value is 0, the neighbor will ignore all metrics
except the TOS 0 metric.
Bit 2, if set, indicates that the system is network multicast capable,
that is implementing OSPF multicast routing.
- State - The state
of the virtual neighbor relationship.
- Events - The number
of times this virtual link has changed its state, or an error has occurred.
- LS
Retransmit Q Len - The current length of the retransmission queue.
- Hello
Suppressed - Indicates whether Hellos are being suppressed to the
neighbor.
- OSPF
Configuration - Opens the OSPF Area Configuration page, see Section
11.20.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays OSPF host parameters.

Figure 163 The OSPF Host Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- IP Address - The IP
Address of the host.
- TOS -
The Type Of Service of the route being configured.
- Metric - The metric
to be advertised.
- Area
ID - The area the host entry is to be found within. By default, the area
that a subsuming OSPF interface is in, or 0.0.0.0.
- OSPF
Configuration - Opens the OSPF Area Configuration page, see Section
11.20.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the alarms and status of a PFU. A warning will be
displayed if notifications from the unit are disabled.

Figure 164 PFU Alarms and Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Unit - Alarms and
status of the unit.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the unit.
- In
Service - The unit is operating properly.
- Out of
Service - The unit is not operating or not present.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the alarms and status of an FAU. A warning will be
displayed if notifications from the unit are disabled.

Figure 165 The FAU Alarms and Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Unit - Alarms and
status of the unit.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the unit.
- In
Service - The unit is operating properly.
- Out of
Service - The unit is not operating or not present.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the alarms and status of the NPU1 BA and provides links to
the DS1 interfaces and user I/O ports. A warning will be displayed if
notifications from the unit are disabled.

Figure 166 The NPU1 BA Alarms and Status
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Unit - Alarms and
status of the unit.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the unit.
- In
Service - The unit is operating properly.
- Reduced
Service - Traffic is running but the management functionality is
reduced or unavailable. The unit is in a warm reset state where all
control and management logic is reset.
- Out of
Service - The unit is not operating. The unit is in a cold reset state
where all traffic, control and management logics are reset.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- RMM -
Alarms and status for the RMM. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- DS1 -
Alarms and status of the DS1 interfaces. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. Clicking a link opens the DS1 Alarms and
Status page, where a complete alarm description can be found, see Section
11.134.
- User
I/O - Alarms and status of the User Input/Output ports. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. Clicking a link opens the User Input
Alarms and Status and User Output Alarms and Status pages, where
complete alarm descriptions can be found, see Section
11.141 and Section
11.142.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the alarms and status of the NPU1 ANSI and provides links
to the DS1 interfaces and user I/O ports. A warning will be displayed if
notifications from the unit are disabled.

Figure 167 The NPU1 ANSI Alarms and Status
page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Unit - Alarms and
status of the unit.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the unit.
- In
Service - The unit is operating properly.
- Reduced
Service - Traffic is running but the management functionality is
reduced or unavailable. The unit is in a warm reset state where all
control and management logic is reset.
- Out of
Service - The unit is not operating. The unit is in a cold reset state
where all traffic, control and management logics are reset.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- DS1 -
Alarms and status of the DS1 interfaces. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. Clicking a link opens the DS1 Alarms and
Status page, where a complete alarm description can be found, see Section
11.134.
- User
I/O - Alarms and status of the User Input/Output ports. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. Clicking a link opens the User Input
Alarms and Status and User Output Alarms and Status pages, where
complete alarm descriptions can be found, see Section
11.141 and Section
11.142.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the alarms and status of the NPU2 A and provides links to
its interfaces. A warning will be displayed if notifications from the unit are
disabled.

Figure 168 The NPU2 A Alarms and Status
page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Unit - Alarms and
status of the unit.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the unit.
- In
Service - The unit is operating properly.
- Reduced
Service - Traffic is running but the management functionality is
reduced or unavailable. The unit is in a warm reset state where all
control and management logic is reset.
- Out of
Service - The unit is not operating. The unit is in a cold reset state
where all traffic, control and management logics are reset.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- RMM -
Alarms and status for the RMM. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- DS1 -
Alarms and status of the DS1 interfaces. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. Clicking a link opens the DS1 Alarms and
Status page, where a complete alarm description can be found, see Section
11.134.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.

Figure 169 The ETU2 Alarms and Status page
- Unit - Alarms and
status of the unit.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the unit.
- In
Service - The unit is operating properly.
- Reduced
Service - Traffic is running but the management functionality is
reduced or unavailable. The unit is in a warm reset state where all
control and management logic is reset.
- Out of
Service - The unit is not operating. The unit is in a cold reset state
where all traffic, control and management logics are reset.
- Severity - Displays
a color-coded severity for each active alarm. See also Section
7.2.4.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit, or Off if notifications
are disabled. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- Bridge
Interface - Status of the Bridge interface.
- Near
End MAC - MAC address of the near end interface.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the interface.
- Notif. - Displays
if notifications from the interface are enabled or disabled.
- IM
Group - Status of the IM Group interface.
- Near
End MAC - MAC address of the near end interface.
- Far End
MAC - MAC address of the far end interface.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the interface.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the alarms and status of the LTU 16xDS1 and provides links
to the DS1 interfaces. A warning will be displayed if notifications from the
unit are disabled.

Figure 170 The LTU 16xDS1 Alarms and Status
page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Unit - Alarms and
status of the unit.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the unit.
- In
Service - The unit is operating properly.
- Reduced
Service - Traffic is running but the management functionality is
reduced or unavailable. The unit is in a warm reset state where all
control and management logic is reset.
- Out of
Service - The unit is not operating. The unit is in a cold reset state
where all traffic, control and management logics are reset.
- Severity - Displays
a color-coded severity for each active alarm. See also Section
7.2.4.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- DS1 -
Alarms and status of the DS1 interfaces. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. Clicking a link opens the DS1 Alarms and
Status page, where a complete alarm description can be found, see Section
11.134.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the alarms and status of the LTU 12xDS1 and provides links
to the DS1 interfaces. A warning will be displayed if notifications from the
unit are disabled.

Figure 171 The LTU 12xDS1 Alarms and Status
page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Unit - Alarms and
status of the unit.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the unit.
- In
Service - The unit is operating properly.
- Reduced
Service - Traffic is running but the management functionality is
reduced or unavailable. The unit is in a warm reset state where all
control and management logic is reset.
- Out of
Service - The unit is not operating. The unit is in a cold reset state
where all traffic, control and management logics are reset.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- DS1 -
Alarms and status of the DS1 interfaces. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. Clicking a link opens the DS1 Alarms and
Status page, where a complete alarm description can be found, see Section
11.134.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page displays the alarms and status of the LTU 155 ANSI and its
OC-3/STS-3 port and provides a link to the Line/Section interface. A warning
will be displayed if notifications from the unit are disabled.

Figure 172 The LTU 155 ANSI Alarms and Status
page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Unit - Alarms and
status of the unit.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the unit.
- In
Service - The unit is operating properly.
- Reduced
Service - Traffic is running but the management functionality is
reduced or unavailable. The unit is in a warm reset state where all
control and management logic is reset.
- Out of
Service - The unit is not operating. The unit is in a cold reset state
where all traffic, control and management logics are reset.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- OC-3/STS-3 Port -
Displays the alarms and status of the OC-3/STS-3 port. Only available if the
administrative status of the Line/Section interface is Up.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the OC-3/STS-3 port.
- Not
Configured - The port does not provide traffic until it is configured.
- Stand-alone VT1.5 -
The port has 84 DS1 interfaces and operates alone.
- APS 1+1
VT1.5 - The port is protected sharing 84 DS1 interfaces with the port
on the adjacent unit.
- Wait
For Neighbour - Indicates that the port in the adjacent unit should be
configured as APS 1+1 VT1.5, but it is not yet ready
or the unit is being repaired, removed or otherwise faulty.
- Clock
Source - Displays the operational status of the clock source.
- Rx
Clock - The recovered receive clock is used as the transmit clock.
- Internal - The
local clock source is used as the transmit clock.
- Hold
Over - The last reference is preserved.
- Free
Running - The clock source from the SEC module is used (SEC accuracy).
- SEC
Passive - The SEC module is passive.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms on the port. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- Line/Section - Alarms
and status of the Line/Section interface. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. Clicking a link opens the Line/Section
Alarms and Status page, where a complete alarm description can be found,
see Section
11.137. Unavail. State indicates the worst severity of the near-end
and far-end Unavailable State alarms. Higher Layer indicates the worst
severity of the alarms on higher layer interfaces.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page gives alarms and status information for a near-end Radio Terminal
based on MMU2 BA/CA. It is also possible to view the status of far-end radio
terminals based on MINI-LINK TN and MINI-LINK E.

Figure 173 The Radio Terminal Alarms and Status page
showing the Far End
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Note:
- To show the configuration of the far-end, click
Show Far End.
The upper part of the page illustrates the Radio Terminal, with rectangles
representing the units and framed arrows representing the different interfaces.
The MMU holds the traffic interfaces (DS1, MUX12 andMUX23) and the RAU IF. The
RAU holds the RF interface. For a protected Radio Terminal, a SWITCH interface
is available on the active MMU.
The highest alarm severity for each entity is indicated by a color and
detailed information is displayed in the lower part when clicking a specific
entity. Tool tips are provided when the pointer is moved over a unit or an
interface.
- Radio Terminal
<ID> - The identity of the Radio Terminal.
- Transmitter -
Displays the status of the transmitter in the RAU.
- RF
Loop - Displays if an RF loop is set.
- IF
Loop - Displays if an IF loop is set.
- Active
Tx - For a protected Radio Terminal. Displays the active TDM Tx
(Ra1/Ra2).
- Switch
Mode - For a protected Radio Terminal. Displays if manual or automatic
switch mode is set.
- Active
Rx - For a protected Radio Terminal. Displays the active TDM Rx
(Ra1/Ra2).
- MMU2
BA/CA <ID> - Displays alarms and status information for the MMU. A
warning will be displayed if notifications are disabled.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the unit.
- In
Service - The unit is operating properly.
- Reduced
Service - Traffic is running but the management functionality is
reduced or unavailable. The unit is in a warm reset state where all
control and management logic is reset.
- Out of
Service - The unit is not operating. The unit is in a cold reset state
where all traffic, control and management logics are reset.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- MUX23
- Displays alarms and status for the MUX23 interface, if applicable. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. Clicking an interface link opens the
MUX23 Alarms and Status page, see Section
11.136.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the interface.
- Up
- Payload is passing on the interface and one or more of the active lower
layers have operational status Up.
- Down - A defect is
detected on the interface or administrative status is set to Down.
- Unknown - The unit
is in cold reset, warm reset or repair state.
- Alarms - Displays
active alarms in the interface. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- Notif. - Displays
if notifications from the interface are enabled or disabled.
- AIS
detect - Displays if AIS detection is enabled or disabled.
- MUX12
- Displays alarms and status for the MUX12 interface(s), if applicable. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. Clicking an interface link opens the
MUX12 Alarms and Status page, see Section
11.135.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the interface.
- Up
- Payload is passing on the interface and one or more of the active lower
layers have operational status Up.
- Down - A defect is
detected on the interface or administrative status is set to Down.
- Unknown - The unit
is in cold reset, warm reset or repair state.
- Lower
Layer Down - The interface is Down due to lower layer interfaces.
Payload is passing on the interface but not all active lower layers have
operational status Up.
- Alarms - Displays
active alarms in the interface. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- Notif. - Displays
if notifications from the interface are enabled or disabled.
- AIS
detect - Displays if AIS detection is enabled or disabled.
- DS1 -
Displays alarms and status for the DS1 interfaces. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. Clicking an interface link opens the DS1
Alarms and Status page, see Section
11.134.
- RAU
IF - Displays alarms and status information for the MMU's interface with
the RAU. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. A warning will be displayed if notifications
are disabled.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the interface.
- Up
- Payload is passing on the interface.
- Down - A defect is
detected on the interface or administrative status is set to Down.
- Lower
Layer Down - The interface is Down due to lower layer interfaces.
Payload is passing on the interface but not all active lower layers have
operational status Up.
- Testing - The
interface is in test mode, for example a loop is active or a BERT is
running.
- Unknown - The unit
is in cold reset, warm reset or repair state.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the interface. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- RAU -
Displays alarms and status information for the RAU. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. A warning will be displayed if notifications
are disabled.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the unit.
- In
Service - The unit is operating properly.
- Reduced
Service - Traffic is running but the management functionality is
reduced or unavailable.
- Out of
Service - The unit is not operating. The transmitter is turned
off.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- RF -
Displays alarms and status information for the RF interface. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. A warning will be displayed if notifications
are disabled.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the interface.
- Up
- The transmitter is on, no loop is set and no RCC alarm is active.
- Down - The
transmitter is off or an RCC alarm is active.
- Testing - The
transmitter is on and a loop is set.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the interface. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- SWITCH (MMU2 BA/CA
only) - Displays alarms and status information for the SWITCH interface in a
protected Radio Terminal. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions. A warning will be displayed if notifications
are disabled.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the interface.
- Up
- Payload is passing on the interface.
- Down - A defect is
detected on the interface or administrative status is set to Down.
- Lower
Layer Down - The interface is Down due to lower layer interfaces.
Payload is passing on the interface but not all active lower layers have
operational status Up.
- Testing - The
interface is in test mode, for example a loop is active or a BERT is
running.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the interface. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- Reset
Switch Alarms - Resets the Tx Switch Over alarm and the Remote Tx Switch
Over alarm.
- Note:
- Make sure the standby transmitter is
working properly before resetting these alarms.
- Launch
Far End EEM - Opens a second browser window for the far-end NE. Only
available when there is a working DCN connection and for far-end terminals
based on MMU2, MMU2 BA/CA.
- Launch
MSM - Starts MSM for the radio link. Only available for far-end terminals
based on MINI-LINK E or ATU C.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page provides alarms and status information for the MMU2.

Figure 174 The MMU2 Alarms and Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Note:
- It is important to use MSM or MINI-LINK E
Adapter to get the complete set of alarms for the terminal.
A warning will be displayed if notifications from the unit are disabled.
- Unit - Alarms and
status of the unit.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the unit.
- In
Service - The unit is operating properly.
- Reduced
Service - Traffic is running but the management functionality is
reduced or unavailable. The unit is in a warm reset state where all
control and management logic is reset.
- Out of
Service - The unit is not operating. The unit is in a cold reset state
where all traffic, control and management logics are reset.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.
- Radio
Terminal - Provides a summary alarm for the Radio Terminal.
- Terminal ID - The
terminal identity.
- Severity - The
severity of the summary alarm.
- View
Alarms for the Radio Link - Starts MSM or MINI-LINK E Adapter for the
selected terminal providing complete alarm information.
- RAU -
Links associated with the RAU.
- RAU
<ID> - Opens the RAU Alarms and Status page, see Section
11.128.
- Status - The status
of the unit.
- View
Alarms - Starts MSM or MINI-LINK E Adapter displaying the alarms for the
RAU.
- RAU
IF - Provides a link to the interface with the RAU.
- RAU IF
<ID> - Opens the RAU IF Alarms and Status page, see Section
11.130.
- Status - The status
of the interface.
- Higher
Layers - Indicates the worst severity of the alarms on higher layer
interfaces.
- Reload - Reloads the
page with the latest information.
This page provides alarms and status information for an RAU connected to an
MMU2.

Figure 175 The RAU Alarms and Status page
- Note:
- The page is not updated automatically. Click
Reload to display the latest information.
- Note:
- It is important to use MSM or MINI-LINK E
Adapter to get the complete set of alarms for the terminal. There are alarms
on the RAU that will not be displayed on this page.
A warning will be displayed if notifications from the unit are disabled.
- Unit - Alarms and
status of the unit.
- Status - Displays
the operational status of the unit.
- In
Service - The unit is operating properly.
- Reduced
Service - Traffic is running but the management functionality is
reduced or unavailable.
- Out of
Service - The unit is not operating. The transmitter is turned
off.
- Alarms - Lists
active alarms in the unit. See Section
7.2.5 for alarm descriptions.